Nortel Circuit Card 311 Bedienungsanleitung

Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Ref erence NN43001-311 .[...]

Document status: Standard Document version: 01.04 Document date: 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Netw orks All Rights Reser v ed. Sourced in Canada LEGAL NO TICE While the information in this document is belie ved to be accurate and reliable , except as otherwise expressly ag reed to in wr iting NORTEL PR OVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS I[...]

3 Contents New in this release 13 Other 13 Revision History 13 New circuit cards f or CS 1000 Release 5 14 How to get help 15 Getting help from the Nor tel web site 15 Getting help over the telephone from a Nor tel Solutions Center 15 Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 15 Getting help through a Nor tel distributor or re[...]

4 Contents Option settings 81 Contents 81 Circuit card grid 82 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 84 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 89 NT6D80 Multi-pur pose Ser ial Data Link card 92 NT8D14 Universal T runk card 93 NT8D15 E and M T runk card 95 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card 96 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC 96 NT8D22 System Mo[...]

Contents 5 Physical description 161 Functional description 164 F ront panel connector pin assignments 165 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 169 Contents 169 Introduction 169 Physical description 170 Functional description 176 Electrical specifications 185 Installation and configuration 188 Clocking Requirement 223 Connecting MGC DECT [...]

6 Contents Introduction 363 Applications 363 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 365 Contents 365 Introduction 365 MFC signaling 365 MFE signaling 367 Sender and receiver mode 368 Physical specifications 370 NT6D70 SILC Line card 373 Contents 373 Introduction 373 Physical description 375 Functional description 375 NT6D71 UILC line card 383 Contents 383 Introduct[...]

Contents 7 Installing the Data Access card 479 P or t configuration 481 Cabling 482 Backplane pinout and signaling 487 Configuring the Data Access card 490 Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DA C 494 Upgrading systems 494 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 499 Contents 499 Introduction 499 Physical description 501 Functional description 506 Elec[...]

8 Contents Connector pin assignments 776 Configuration 784 Applications 795 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface P addle Board 801 Contents 801 Introduction 801 Physical description 802 Functional description 803 Connector pin assignments 805 Configuring the SDI paddle board 805 Applications 809 NT8D41B A Quad Serial Data Interface Pad dle Board 821 Co[...]

Contents 9 Physical description 909 Functional description 910 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 923 Contents 923 Introduction 923 Physical description 924 Functional description 932 Architecture 933 NT AK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard 953 Contents 953 Introduction 953 Physical description 955 Functional description 956 NTBK22 MISP card 961 Con[...]

10 Contents Introduction 1017 Memory 1019 100BaseT IP daughterboards 1020 PC card interface 1023 Security device 1023 SDI por ts 1024 Conferencing 1025 Media Gatew ay/Media Gatew ay Expansion card slot assignment 1025 NTD W60 Media Gatewa y Controller Car d 1029 Contents 1029 Introduction 1029 Processor 1032 Ethernet por ts 1032 External connection[...]

Contents 11 Init 1043 DIP switch 1043 LED indicators 1043 Status LED 1043 Active CPU LED 1043 Ethernet LEDs 1044 Remov able and fixed media driv e LEDs 1044 NTD W62 and NTD W64 Media Gatewa y Controller Daughterboards 1045 Contents 1045 Introduction 1045 Media Gatew ay Controller card 1045 Daughterboard configurations 1047 NTD W65 V oice Gatewa y[...]

12 Contents Functional description 1091 Connector pin assignments 1095 Configuring the ESDI card 1097 Applications 1101 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 1103 Contents 1103 Introduction 1103 Physical description 1104 Functional description 1105 Connector pin assignments 1107 Configuring the QSDI card 1109 Applications 1113 The TDS/DTR card 1[...]

13 Ne w in this release This technical document provides information about circuit cards for the CS 1000 Release 5.5. Non-suppor ted circuit cards hav e been deleted from the document. Other Revision History June 2008 Standard 01.04. This document has been up-issued to include information in the "Jumper and switch settings" (page 528) sec[...]

14 New in this release • Multi-purpose Serial Data Link: Description (553-3001-195) • Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing (553-3001-211) • Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) (Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) also appears in Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals (NN4[...]

15 Ho w to g et help This chapter explains how to get help for Nor tel products and ser vices. Getting help from the Nor tel web site The best wa y to get technical suppor t for Nor tel products is from the Nor tel T echnical Suppor t web site: w ww . nor tel.com/suppor t This site provides quic k access to software, documentation, b ulletins, and [...]

16 How to get help Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract f or your Nor tel product from a distr ibutor or author ized reseller , contact the technical suppor t staff for that distr ibutor or reseller . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.[...]

17 Overview Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Line cards" (page 18) "Installation" (page 19) "Operation" (page 21) "Analog line interface units" (page 26) "Digital line interface units" (page 28) "Analog line call operation" (page 30) "Digital line [...]

18 Overview Line cards The f ollowing line cards are designed using the Intelligent P eripheral Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended f or use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Ta b l e 1 "Line card characteristics" (page 18) lists the line card characteristics. Ta b[...]

Line cards 19 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card The NT5D11/14 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the s witch to T1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The T1-compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems , channel banks containing FXS cards, and ke y sy[...]

20 Overview Figure 1 IPE line car ds shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module When installing line cards, f ollow these general procedures: Step Action 1 Configure the jumpers and s witches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. 2 Install the line card into the selected slot. 3 Install the cab le that connects the backplane connector on th[...]

Line cards 21 Once these steps are complete, the ter minal equipment is ready for use . Operation This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the busses that carr y signals to and from the line cards, and how the y connect to ter minal equipment. These diff erences are summarized in T able 2 [...]

22 Overview • ringing signal on/off • message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carr ied on the card LAN link. Some e xamples of maintenance data include: • polling • repor ting of self-test status • CP initiated card reset • repor ting of card ID (card type[...]

Line cards 23 Figure 2 T ypical IPE analog line card arc hitecture DS-30X loops The line interfaces pro vided by the line cards connect to conv entional 2-wire (tip and r ing) line f acilities. IPE analog line cards conv er t the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call Ser ver over DS-30X network loo[...]

24 Overview IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as 512 kHz Time Compressed Multiple x ed (TCM) data. The digital line card conv er ts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and transmits it in the ne xt av ailable timeslot. When a word is receiv ed from the DS-30X loop , the digital line card conv [...]

Line cards 25 Figure 3 DS-30X loop data format DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit b lock diagram" (page 29) . A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X l[...]

26 Overview In nor mal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slav e cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slav e card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address f or identification. In its reply , the slav e inf or ms the controller[...]

Line cards 27 Figure 4 T ypical analog line interface unit bloc k diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conv ersion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-La w companding[...]

28 Overview amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed b y the system controller . This allows the system to make up f or line losses according to the loss plan. Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 3 / 4 , 900 3 / 4 , 3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching n[...]

Line cards 29 The digital line interf ace card contains one or more digital line interf ace units. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit b lock diagram" (page 29) . Each digital line interf ace unit contains a Digital Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The pur pose of each DLIC is to demultiple x data from the DS-30X Tx channel into integ[...]

30 Overview Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows f or a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms. Signaling The digital line interf ace units also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, monitor , and ta[...]

Line cards 31 Figure 6 Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

32 Overview Figure 7 Call connection sequence - near-end originating call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Line cards 33 Message waiting Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting f eature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that dr ive a message waiting light, the light is tur ned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power supply . When the line car[...]

34 Overview is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) f or more information. Digital line call operation Digital line call operation is controlled entirely b y use of messages between the digital telephone and the system. The[...]

Line cards 35 Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

36 Overview Figure 9 Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence Call operation is described by categorizing the operation into the follo wing main states: • Idle (on-hook) Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Line cards 37 • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Star t Mode In Loop Star t mode, the A and B bits meaning is: • T ransmit from L TI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) • Receive to L TI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = 1 (no r ing gro[...]

38 Overview depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the ter minal equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it responds by changing the Lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to 0 (open loop).The call is now terminated and the interf ace is in the idle (on-hook) state. F or the Lineside T1 card to suppor t distan[...]

Line cards 39 Transmit Receive State A B A B • Idle 0101 • Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card 0 1/0 01 • Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1/0 11 • Lineside T1 card stops ringing 0111 Outgoing Calls : • Idle 0101 • Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0111 Call Disconnect from far end: • Steady state (call in progress) 0111 • Far[...]

40 Overview the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 dur ing ring on, 1 dur ing r ing off), and ground on the tip lead by setting the transmit A bit to 0. When an incoming call is answ ered (by the ter minal equipment going off-hook), the ter minal equipment simulates tripping the r inging and shutting off r inging by causing the lineside T1’s recei[...]

Line cards 41 Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment Alternatively , while a call is in process, the ter minal equipment may disconnect b y going on-hook, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0. The Lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating the removal of g round from the tip b y changing its transmit A [...]

42 Overview Lineside T1 card has operational limitations compared to typical ground star t interface equipment relating to star t of dialing, distant end disconnect and glare potential . Distant end disconnect restrictions If the SAL f eature is not a vailable in the CS 1000 softw are, the Lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Custom[...]

Line cards 43 Off-premise line protection Off-premise applications are installations where the telephone lines are e xtended outside the building where the PBX system is housed, b ut the lines are not connected to public access f acilities. This application is commonly ref erred to as a "campus installation." In off-premise applications, [...]

44 Overview Device order code Analog Line Digital Line Manufacturer 6AP 6DP Oneac Corporation 27944 North Bradley Road Libertyville, IL 60048-9700 (800) 553-7166 or (800) 327-8801 x555 ESP-200 ESP-050 EDCO Inc. of Florida 1805 N.E. 19th Avenue P.O. Box 1778 Ocala, FL 34478 (904) 732-3029 or (800) 648-4076 These de vices are compatible with 66 type [...]

T runk cards 45 Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use T able 6 "T r unk card characteristics" (page 45) to select the tr unk card that meets system needs. Ta b l e 6 T runk card c haracteristics Part Number Description Trun ks Trunk Types Architect ure NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 8 CO/FX/WATS trunks*, d[...]

46 Overview • 4-wire E and M T runks with: — T ype I or T ype II signaling — Duple x (DX) signaling • P aging (P A G) trunks The trunk type and function can be configured on a per por t basis. Dialing outpulsing is provided on the card. Make and break r atios are defined in software and downloaded b y software commands. NTCK16 Generic Cen[...]

Operation 47 Figure 10 IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module 3 Install the cab le that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution F rame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the selected ter minal equipment at the[...]

48 Overview Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE b us use a b uilt-in microcontroller . The IPE microcontroller is used f or the follo wing: • to perf or m local diagnostics (self-test) • to configure the card according to instr uctions issued by the system processor • to repor t back to the system processor information such as card ide[...]

Operation 49 Figure 11 T ypical IPE trunk card ar chitecture The s witch communicates with IPE modules over two separ ate interfaces . V oice and signaling data are sent and received o ver DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is inf or mation directly rela[...]

50 Overview Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carr ied on the card LAN link. Some e xamples of maintenance data are as follows: • polling • repor ting of self-test status • CPU initiated card reset • repor ting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) • repor ting of fir mwar[...]

Operation 51 clock frequency supplied b y the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate f or a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization. Signaling data is tr ansmitted to and from the line cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When[...]

52 Overview LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 "T ypical IPE tr unk card architecture" (page 49) ). The output bus is used b y the controller f or output of control data to the trunk card.The input b us is used by the controller f or input of trunk card status data[...]

Operation 53 other cards are slav es. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enab les a slav e card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slav e at a time. In nor mal operation, the controller card continually scans (p[...]

54 Overview Figure 14 T ypical trunk interface unit bloc k diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The coder/decoder (codec) perf orms Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) con version of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-La w companding algor[...]

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55 Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network is capable of pro viding either a 600 ohm or a 900 ohm (or both) impedance matching network. It also conv er ts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is a trans[...]

56 Overview Compatible System Options Card Ports Port types 51C, 61C 81C QPC841 4 RS-232-C asynchronous X X QPC513 2 RS-232-C synchronous or high-speed synchronous* XX *See the section on the QPC513 card in this manual for details on the high-speed interface The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board does not use a front panel. It mounts to the rear of the bac[...]

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 57 — Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disab le s witch and LED • input/output (I/O) de vice address selectable b y on-board switches . The QPC513 ESDI card provides these f eatures: • fully synchronous serial data interf ace por ts, each suppor ting — RS-232-C or modified RS-422[...]

58 Overview Ta b l e 1 0 En vironmental specifications Specification Operation Storage Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C; (32 to 122 F) –55 to +70 C; (–58 to 158 F) Relative humidity (non-condensing) 5% to 95% 0% to 95% Altitude 3500m; (11000 ft) 15000m; (50000 ft) Electrostatic disc harge The SDI cards meet the requirements of the IEC 801-2, clau[...]

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 59 Maintenance The follo wing maintenance programs are used to maintain individual SDI asynchronous por ts. The program used depends on the application of the por t. • LD 37 Input/Output Diagnostics – Used for system ter minal, printer , backg round ter minal por ts, and system monitor status. • LD 42 Call De[...]

60 Overview Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

61 Cir cuit car d installation Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Card slots - Large System" (page 61) "Circuit and installation" (page 62) "Precautions" (page 64) "Installing a circuit card" (page 66) Card slots - Lar ge System The f ollowing tab le in this chapter identi?[...]

62 Circuit card installation Circuit and installation Ta b l e 1 1 Large System card slots Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II ® card 81C Core/Net: "CP" A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II 81C Core/Net: "CP" NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7 NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card IPE: &qu[...]

Circuit and installation 63 Component Large System NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K70 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K71 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K72 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K82 Cent[...]

64 Circuit card installation Component Large System NT9D19 Call Processor card 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16 NTAG03 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTAG36 Nortel Integrated Recorded Announcer IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTBK51 Dow[...]

Precautions 65 W ARNING Module cov ers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers . Lift cov ers awa y from the module and set them out of your work area. W ARNING Circuit cards may contain a lithium batter y . There is a danger of explosion if the batter y is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace th[...]

66 Circuit card installation Figure 15 Static discharge points During repair and maintenance procedures do the follo wing: • T urn off the circuit breaker or s witch for a module power supply bef ore the power supply is removed or inser ted. • In A C-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge. W ait five full minutes betwee[...]

Installing a circuit card 67 D ANGER T o av oid personal injur y and equipment damage, read all of the guidelines in "Circuit and installation" (page 62) before y ou begin installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure. Procedure 2 Installing a circuit car d Step Action 1 Open the protective car ton and remov e the circui[...]

68 Circuit card installation Figure 16 Installing the cir cuit card in the card cage 7 Inser t the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until y ou f eel resistance. The tip of the locking de vice must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16 "Installing the circuit card in the card c[...]

Installing a circuit card 69 Note: An initialization causes a momentar y interr uption in call processing. 11 If you are installing the card in a working system, ref er to the work order and the technical document, Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) to add the required office data to the system memor y . 12 Go to the[...]

70 Circuit card installation Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

71 Acceptance tests Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 71) "Conf erence cards" (page 71) "Digitone receiver cards" (page 74) "Line cards" (page 75) "Multifrequency sender cards" (page 75) "Multifrequency signaling cards" (page 76) &quo[...]

72 Acceptance tests 1 Log into the system: LOGI (pass word) 2 Request the status of a loop on the conference card: LD 38 STAT loop Conf erence status is f ormatted as f ollows: CNFC n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of conf erence groups disabled and busy CHAN n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of channels disabled an[...]

Conference cards 73 CNFC MAN loop c Where "c" is the manual conference group (1-15) A manual conf erence test is performed by stepping through conf erence channels and groups, listening f or noise that indicates a f aulty card. The manual conf erence test can be performed through a system terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands[...]

74 Acceptance tests —End— Digitone receiver cards Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop P eripheral Buff er card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used in single loop mode. Procedure 4 T esting digitone receiver cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiv er (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the[...]

Multifrequency sender cards 75 Line cards Procedure 5 T esting line car ds Step Action Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (pass word) 2 P erf or m a network memor y test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l s loop and shelf numbers If the system response is other than OK ,[...]

76 Acceptance tests 2 T est and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS loop (on the NT8D17 Conf erence/TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the e ven loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inser ted. Y ou must enab le the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to add[...]

T runk cards 77 LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf , card, and unit numbers If the system response is other than OK , see Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3 End the session in LD 54: **** —End— Network car ds Procedure 8 T esting netw ork cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a networ[...]

78 Acceptance tests Procedure 9 T esting a trunk car d using a maintenance telephone Step Action 1 Access the system from a maintenance telephone. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) f or details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone. 2 T est the t[...]

T one and digit switch cards 79 **** 5 T est an automatically identified outward dialing (AIOD) tr unk card: LD 41 AIOD l s c loop, shelf , and card numbers If the system response is other than OK , see Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 6 End the session in LD 41: **** —End— T one and di[...]

80 Acceptance tests If the system response is other than OK , see Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administrati[...]

81 Option settings Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Circuit card grid" (page 82) "NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card" (page 83) T able 14 "General pur pose switch settings" (page 85) "NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC" (page 89) "NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane[...]

82 Option settings "QPC414 Network card" (page 105) "QPC441 3-P or t Extender cards" (page 106) "QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling T r unk cards" (page 108) "QPC528 CO/FX/W A TS T r unk cards" (page 109) "QPC471 Clock Controller card" (page 110) "QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO T runk card" [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83 Figure 17 Circuit car d grid NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card T able 13 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 83) lists option settings f or the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card. Ta b l e 1 3 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Cla[...]

84 Option settings Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OP[...]

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 85 General purpose switches Use s witch set SW9 for T runk 0; use s witch set SW15 for T runk 1 (see Ta b l e 14 "General pur pose switch settings" (page 85) ). Ta b l e 1 4 General purpose switch settings Switch Description SW9/SW15 switch setting 1 Framing Mode off - ESF on - SF 2 Yellow Alarm Method off -[...]

86 Option settings A set of four DIP s witches provides selection among three values f or receiver impedance. Use SW8 f or T r unk 0; use SW14 f or T r unk 1 (see Ta b l e 17 "T r unk interf ace impedance switch settings" (page 86) ). Ta b l e 1 7 T runk interface impedance switch settings Description SW8/SW14 Switch Settings 75 off off o[...]

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 87 Ta b l e 1 9 DCH mode and address select switch settings Swit ch Description S3 Switch Setting 1-4 D-Channel daughterboard Address See the next table. 5-7 For future use off 8 External DCH or Onboard DDCH off - MSDL or DCHI card on - Onboard DDCH daughterboard Ta b l e 2 0 NTBK51AA daughterboard address select swit[...]

88 Option settings Illustrations of switch locations and settings Figure 18 "Switch functions and areas" (page 88) displays functional areas f or s witches on the NT5D12 DDP card. Figure 18 Switch functions and areas Figure 19 "Switch default settings" (page 89) displays def ault settings f or s witches on the NT5D12 DDP card. N[...]

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 89 Figure 19 Switch default settings NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC T able 21 "NT6D42 recommended options f or Nor th American and British T elecom" (page 90) through T able 26 "NT6D42CC SW2" (page 91) list option settings f or the NT6D42 Ringing Generator . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Ca[...]

90 Option settings Ta b l e 2 1 NT6D42 recommended options for Nor th American and British T elecom Application Ringing frequency Ringing voltage Jumper locations Ringing output North America 20 Hz 86 V ac P5 High voltage message waiting Low impedance British Telecom 25 Hz 80 V ac P4 No high voltage message waiting Low impedance Ta b l e 2 2 NT6D42[...]

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane 91 Ta b l e 2 5 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing voltage Message waiting voltage 1 2 3 4 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –120 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on 70 V ac –1[...]

92 Option settings NT6D68 Core module backplane Ta b l e 2 8 NT6D68 Core module backplane Jumper Location (between slots) Core 1 Core 0 Note: Berg jumpers are located along the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the card cage assembly.) JB4 JB3 JB2 JB1 9/1 0 10 / 11 11 / 12 12 / 13 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed [...]

NT8D14 Universal T runk card 93 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 30 "NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings" (page 93) through T able 34 "NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss" (page 95) list option settings f or the NT8D14 Universal T runk card. Ta b l e 3 0 NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings Modes Locat[...]

94 Option settings Ta b l e 3 2 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-extended range Jumper strap settings Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should[...]

NT8D15 E and M T r unk card 95 Ta b l e 3 4 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5 2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7 3566 m[...]

96 Option settings NT8D17 Conference/TDS car d Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conf erence attenuation P AD lev els. These P AD le vels are used if prompt CP AD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reser v ed f or future use. Y ou can enab le or disable a warning tone f or conf erence [...]

NT8D22 System Monitor 97 Settings Frequency Amplitude P1 P2 P3 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–12 open open NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor , located in the column with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slav e system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. F or e xamples of syste[...]

98 Option settings Position SW1 function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Not used off on off Not used Not used Not used Meridian 1 columns only on on off off on off on off Ta b l e 3 7 NT8D22 SW2 Position SW2 indication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Master system monitor Slave system monitor on off Not used All other operatio[...]

NT8D22 System Monitor 99 Ta b l e 3 9 NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master Switch position Switch position How many slave units 34 5 6 7 8 How many slave units 34 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on on on 32 off on on on on on 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on 3 on on on on off off 35 off [...]

100 Option settings Switch position Switch position How many slave units 34 5 6 7 8 How many slave units 34 5 6 7 8 30 on off off off off on 62 off off off off off on 31 on off off off off off 63 off off off off off off Ta b l e 4 0 NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave Position Position Slave unit address 34 5 6 7 8 Slave unit address 34 [...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface P addle Board 101 Position Position Slave unit address 34 5 6 7 8 Slave unit address 34 5 6 7 8 27 on off off on off off 59 off off off on off off 28 on off off off on on 60 off off off off on on 29 on off off off on off 61 off off off off on off 30 on off off off off on 62 off off off off off on 31 on off off of[...]

102 Option settings Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card alwa ys address the four U AR Ts using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The configurations f or both switches are shown in T able 42 "QSDI paddle board address s witch settings" (page 102) . T o av oid system problems, s witches SW15 and SW16 mu[...]

NT8D72 Pr imar y Rate Interface card 103 Ta b l e 4 3 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Port 1 - SW 3 Port 1 -SW 2 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 61234 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on[...]

104 Option settings Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP switch settings QPC43 P eripheral Signaling card Options (minimum vintage N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module F13 NT8D35 Network module Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

QPC414 Network card 105 QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and P aging T runk cards Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch Applicati on 1234 5 6 7 8123 4 5 6 7 8 E and M off off off on off off on off off off off on off off on off Paging off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off DX 2-wir e (condu ctor loop < 2.5 K 3 / 4 ) on on off off [...]

106 Option settings S1 and S2—E33 Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series). These cards can only be used in the option A setting: J3—H5 or E11 J4—H17 or E7 S1 and S2—E33 Note: Connectors and loop relations: Even loop: J1 faceplate connector, jumper at J4 or S1 Odd loop: J2 faceplate connector, jumper at J3[...]

QPC441 3-P or t Extender cards 107 Ta b l e 4 5 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A". Switch Settings Module D20 switch position 123 4 5 6 7 8 NT5D21 (Option 61C) Core/Network 0 off on on off on on on on Core/Network 1 off on on off on on on off NT5D21 (Option 81C) Group 0 off on o[...]

108 Option settings 0 on on on on 1 on on off on 02 on off on on 3 on off off on 4 off on on on 5 off on off on 6 off off on on 7 off off off on 0 on on on off 1 on on off off 12 on off on off 3 on off off off 4 off on on off 5 off on off off 6 off off on off 7 off off off off QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling T runk car ds T able 47 "QPC559, QPC5[...]

QPC528 CO/FX/W A TS T runk cards 109 Ta b l e 4 8 QPC559, QPC560 double density Double density—Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch Application 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off off off off battery and ground pulsing off off off off on off Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3 600 3 / 4 res[...]

110 Option settings Unit 0 jumper (Location E27) Unit 1 jumper (Location E11) Unit 2 jumper (Location D29) Unit 3 jumper (Location D9) Jumper: Unit 0 Jumper Unit 1 Jumper Unit 2 Jumper Unit 3 Jumper 600 3 / 4 resistive impedance Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 3-component complex impedance Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 QPC[...]

QPC550 Direct Inward Dial T runk card 111 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO T runk card Switches at E29/E9/A29/A11 Units 0/1/2/3 Application 1234 5 6 7 8 Zero ohm outpulsing on off off Standard outpulsing off on off Ground start on on off Loop start off off off Loop start, automatic guard detection off on off PPM daughterboard not installed on off [...]

112 Option settings Ta b l e 5 2 QPC550 vintage A-600/900 Ohm impedance selection Switch number Device location Device designation Unit number Impedance (ohms) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 G29(a) S3.0 0 600 off on on off off on on off 900 on off off on on off off on G29(b) S3.1 1 600 off on on off off on on off 900 on off off on on off off on G8(a) S3.2 2 600 o[...]

QPC551 Radio P aging T runk card 113 Ta b l e 5 5 QPC550 vintage B-software control for 2dB pad 2 dB pad control H/W Device location Device designation Unit number Switch number (pad in) (pad out) 1 on off 1 2 off off 3 off off F38 S1.0/1 0 4 on off 1 on off 3 2 off off 3 off off F1 S1.2/3 2 4 on off QPC551 Radio P aging T runk card Signal duration[...]

114 Option settings disabled off 6 off on on off 14 off on on on 7o n o n o n off 15 on on on on *When enabled, this switch prevents a signal from being sent from a paging unit until 5 seconds elapsed time since the beginning of the previous signal on that same unit. S5 (E38) Unit 0 S6 (D1) Unit 1 Impedance termination 1 Real on Complex off QPC595 [...]

QPC775 Clock Controller card 115 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Ta b l e 5 6 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Switch S2 settings To repeater facility To cross-connect point 5o n 0–45 m (0–150 ft) 0–30 m (0–100 ft) 2, 4, 6 on 46–135 m (151–450 ft) 31–100 m (101–355 ft) 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–65[...]

116 Option settings Ta b l e 5 8 QPC775 vintage E switch settings SW1 SW2 SW4 System 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CS 1000M SG on on on on off off off off off on ** CS 1000M MG on off off off off off off off ** on ** *Cable length between the J3 faceplate connectors: 0–4.3 m (0–14 ft) off off 4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft) off on 6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft) [...]

QPC841 4-P or t Serial Data Interface card 117 Device number SW14 Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 off off off off off off off on 14 15 off off off off off off off off Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings. Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set S[...]

118 Option settings Ta b l e 6 1 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Port 1—SW8 Port 1—SW9 Mode 12 3 4 5 612 34 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off off on off off off on on Port 2—SW6 Port 2—SW7 DTE on on on on on on off off off off off o[...]

119 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 119) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 121) "Functional description" (page 124) "Electrical specifications" (page 135) "Operation" (page 138) "Connector pin a[...]

120 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • hookflash • batter y re versal Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/2500 type) T elephone Administration progr am LD 10. Y ou can install this card in any IPE slot. The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card provides eight full duple x analog [...]

Physical description 121 Physical description The line interf ace and common multiple xing circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) pr inted circuit board. The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect [...]

122 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Self T est The f aceplate of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card is equipped with a red LED . When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to fiv e seconds while the self-test r uns. If the self-test is completed successfully , the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When [...]

Physical description 123 Figure 21 OPS analog line car d - faceplate The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED . When an NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to fiv e seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully , the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is[...]

124 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Functional description This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two par ts. First, a descr iption of the card’s control, signaling, and power interf aces is given, f ollowed b y a descr iption of how the card itself functions. See Figure 22[...]

Functional description 125 Figure 22 "OPS analog line card - bloc k diagram" (page 124) shows a b lock diagram of the major functions contained on the OPS analog line card. Each of these functions are descr ibed on the follo wing pages. Card interfaces The OPS analog line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintena[...]

126 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 av ailable timeslots f or its eight line interf aces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in software to f ormat PCM data in the µ-la w or A-law conventions . Maintenance communication Maintenance communication is the e xchange of control and[...]

Functional description 127 The card LAN link suppor ts the follo wing functions on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card: • polling • repor ting of self-test status • CPU initiated card reset • repor ting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) • repor ting of fir mware version • repor ting of line interface unit configuration • enabl[...]

128 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card signaling. T wo codecs are provided f or performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) con version of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec suppor ts f our interface units and contains switchab le pads f or control of transmission loss on a per unit basis. The follo wi[...]

Functional description 129 • standard or comple x balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm or 3COM1 or 3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis • loopback of PCM signals ov er DS-30X network loop f or diagnostic pur poses The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply r inging onto the[...]

130 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Control functions are provided b y a microcontroller , a card LAN interf ace, and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card. Control functions are provided b y a microcontroller , a Card LAN link, and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card. Microcontr oller-[...]

Functional description 131 — transmission loss le vels Microcontr oller —The microcontroller controls the follo wing: • repor ting to the CPU via the card LAN link: — card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configur ation status • receipt and implementation of[...]

132 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Card LAN interface Maintenance data is e xchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in the section "Intelligent P eripheral Equipment" (page 21) . The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing [...]

Functional description 133 LD 10 is also used to select unit ter minating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively . The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forw ard reminder tone features are enabled by entering data into the customer data b lock using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Ref erence[...]

134 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively . See Software Input/Output Ref erence — Maintenance (NN43001-711) for LD 10 ser vice change instructions. Individual line interf ace units on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card are configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Stati[...]

Electrical specifications 135 Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable length 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 1411 m (4600 ft) 2.5 2 1.6 385.6 240.3 150 1694 m (5600 ft) 3 2.4 1.9 462.8 288.3 180 2541 m (8300 ft) 4.5 3.7 2.8 694.2 432.5 270 8469 m (27800 ft) 15 12.2 9.4 2313.9 1441.7 900 The loss plan [...]

136 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Signaling and control – This por tion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system CPU to oper ate line interf ace circuits dur ing calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and retur n in[...]

Electrical specifications 137 P ower requirements T able 65 "OPS analog line card - power requirements" (page 137) shows the maximum pow er consumed by the card from each system power supply . Ta b l e 6 5 OPS analog line car d - power requirements Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) ±15.0 V dc ±5 % 150 mA +8.5 V dc ±2 % 200 mA +5.0 V dc[...]

138 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Ta b l e 6 6 OPS analog line card - ringer limitations ONS Loop Range Maximum Number of Ringers (REN) 0–10 ohms 3 > 10–460 ohms 2 0 – 10 ohms 3 > 10 – 900 ohms 2 > 900 – 2300 ohms 1 The OPS line card suppor ts up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) r ingers on each line f or either ONS or OPS a[...]

Operation 139 The operation of each unit is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages . When the OPS analog line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and – 48 V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card. The app[...]

140 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card State Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Remarks Two-way voice connection The system detects increase in loop current, tips ringing, and put call through to near-end station. Near end station hangs up first High-resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in l[...]

Operation 141 Ta b l e 6 9 Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call State Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Remarks Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop No battery current drawn. Call request Low resistance loop Near-end station goes off-hook. Battery current is drawn, causing detection of off-h[...]

142 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card ready to receive digits , it retur ns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. F or outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop acro[...]

Connector pin assignments 143 The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The bac kplane is cab led to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution F rame (MDF) by 25-pair cables . Figure 23 OPS analog line card [...]

144 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) f or more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments f or each tip/r ing pair . Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on t[...]

Configuring the OPS analog line card 145 Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire. Note 4: The following are the default software impedance settings: Termination Impedance (TIMP): Balanced Impedance (BIMP): O NP CLS 600 ohms 600 ohms O PX CLS 600 ohms[...]

146 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 24 OPS analog line card - jumper b lock locations Each line interf ace unit on the card is equipped with two jumper bloc ks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See T able 71 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 144) . For units connecte[...]

Application 147 Bef ore the appropr iate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the near-end (Meridian 1) and the f ar-end station must be known. T o assist in deter mining loop length, T able 63 "OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss" (page 134) shows some typical resistance and loss values for the most [...]

148 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card batter y and ringing. F acilities are generally provided by the local e xchange carrier (OPS pairs are usually in the same cable as the PBX-CO tr unks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 25 "T raditional OPS application configuration" (page 149) . Note: OPS ser [...]

Application 149 Figure 25 T raditional OPS application configuration Note 1: OPS ser vice should not be confused with off-premise extension (OPS) ser vice. OPS ser vice is the provision of an e xtension to a main subscriber loop br idged onto the loop at the ser ving CO or PBX. Additionally , OPS as used to denote off-premise extension ser vice sh[...]

150 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Other applications The operating range and built-in protection pro visions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable f or applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Figure 25 "T raditional OPS application configuration" (page 149) . Examples of such[...]

Application 151 • termination to other than a telephone set, such as to a fax machine • individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card can also be configured as On-Premise Station (ONS) por ts in LD 10: — ONS ser vice with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not av ailable on other analog line cards) — to use otherwise idle NT1[...]

152 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • the transmission par ameters of the facilities betw een the Mer idian 1 OPS por t and the off-premise station or termination • the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the ter mination These f actors must be considered when planning applications using the OPS analog line card.[...]

Application 153 When a por t is configured f or CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-b y-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS , an OPS analog line card por t is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls. The loss in the other por t in volv ed in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis to achiev e the t[...]

154 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 15.0 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range) – 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective) = 10.5 dB (required gain treatment) The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line cards be yond 15 dB is not recommended. Loss is inser ted between OPS analog line card po[...]

Application 155 If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not e xceed 15 dB, line treatment using a s witched-gain V oice F requency Repeater (VFR) e xtends the voice r ange. The ov erall range achiev able on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohm loop including telephone resistance). Signaling range is[...]

156 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • The attenuation distor tion (frequency response) of the OPS facility should be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirab le that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz. • The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS por t should appro ximate that of 6[...]

Application 157 regulator y requirements as well as industry standards, the y are not designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting f acilities. • Nor tel Networks recommends that the attenuation distor tion (frequency response) of the OPS f acility be within ±3.0 dB ov er the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desir[...]

158 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • the OPS por t is ser ved b y a line card using a constant-current feeding bridge • the OPS ter mination is to telephones behind a local switch pro viding local current f eed, such as a fax machine or a ke y telephone system OPS line ter minations with loudness characteristics designed for other [...]

Application 159 A f eature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness increases with decreased current. So as the line (Meridian 1 to OPS termination) f acility gets longer and lossier , the increased loudness of the telephone somewhat compensates f or the higher loss, assuming direct current f eed from the PBX with constant [...]

160 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

161 NT4N39AA CP P entium IV Car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 161) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 161) "Functional description" (page 164) "F ront panel connector pin assignments" (page 165) Introduction The NT4N39AA Call Processor P entium IV (CP [...]

162 NT4N39AA CP P entium IV Card The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gask et and two ejector/injector handles. A reset button and two double LED pac kages (f our LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel f eatures the following: • stack ed dual standard DB9 Serial por ts • USB Connector • stack ed dual R[...]

Physical description 163 Figure 26 CP PIV card (fr ont) Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

164 NT4N39AA CP P entium IV Card Figure 27 CP PIV card (side) Functional description The card emplo ys an Intel P entium Processor as the central processing unit. The inter nal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manuf actured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32 KB of on die data and instruction cache as we[...]

F ront panel connector pin assignments 165 Memory CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology . The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two v er ticall DIMM soc kets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only suppor ts DDR SDRAM DIMM memor y with a supply voltage of +2.5V . are suppor tedThe memor y data path is 72-bit wide . The Inte[...]

166 NT4N39AA CP P entium IV Card T able 29. ITP CONNECT OR Pin Outs Ta b l e 7 3 USB connector pin outs Pin number Pin name 1 USB VCC 2 USB- 3 USB+ 4 USB GND 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet por ts The ph ysical interface f or the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ether net por ts to the front panel is through a stack ed dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and LEDs. T[...]

F ront panel connector pin assignments 167 LED Color Functionality Default LED3 Green CompactFlash activity -Off LED4 Green CompactFlash activity -Off ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only) Ta b l e 7 6 ITP connector pin outs Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name P1 GND P2 GND P3 BPM0N P4 NC P5 BPM1N P6 RESETN P7 BPM2N P8 GND P9 BPM3N P10 TDI P11 BPM4N P12 T[...]

168 NT4N39AA CP P entium IV Card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

169 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface car ds Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 169) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 170) "Functional description" (page 176) "Electrical specifications" (page 185) "Installation and configuration" (page 18[...]

170 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the e xpansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed in the Cabinet system). The Lineside T1 card em ulates an[...]

Physical description 171 The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitr y is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.0 in) printed circuit board [...]

172 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Faceplate The f aceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with four LED indicators. See Figure 29 "Lineside T1 card - faceplate" (page 175) . Figure 28 Lineside T1 card faceplate In general, the[...]

Physical description 173 Ta b l e 7 8 NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet been configured in software. STATUS Off The card is in an active state. On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link. (This includes, but is not limited to: not receiving[...]

174 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards If one of these alar m conditions is detected, the red LED lights. Y ellow alarm indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a red alar m condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur : • [...]

Physical description 175 The ST A TUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit f or two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully , the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured[...]

176 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is obser ved when the second card slot is enab led. T o properly disable the card, both card slots must be disab led. The LED does not tur n on until both card slots are disabled. The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected [...]

Functional description 177 Figure 30 Lineside T1 card - bloc k diagram The NT5D14AA provides the follo wing features and functions: • Card interf aces • T1 interf ace circuit • Signaling and control • Card control functions • Microcontroller • Card LAN interf ace • Sanity Timer • Man-Machine Interf ace (MMI) Figure 32 "Lineside[...]

178 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the s witch. Usually , the Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment normally placed between t[...]

Functional description 179 The Lineside T1 interf ace off ers a number of benefits when used to connect to third-par ty applications equipment: • It is a more cost-effectiv e alter native f or connection because it eliminates the need f or expensiv e channel bank equipment. • The Lineside T1 suppor ts powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capa[...]

180 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Over all costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1-compatible peripheral equipment is often more attractively priced than the analog-por t alter natives. The Lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard public or private DSX-1 type carrier facil[...]

Functional description 181 T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop . The line interface circuit perf or ms the follo wing: • Provides an industr y standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 feet) interf ace. • C[...]

182 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and retur n incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop . Card contr ol functions Control functions are provided b y a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the Lineside T1 card. A sanity t[...]

Functional description 183 The Lineside T1 card contains two microcontrollers that control the inter nal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontrollers control the f ollowing: • repor ting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link: — card identification (card type, vintage, ser ial number) — fi[...]

184 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards — programming of loop interf ace control circuits for administration of channel operation — maintenance diagnostics • interf ace with the line card circuit: — conv er ts on/off-hook, and r inger control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations f or each time slot in the T1 da[...]

Electrical specifications 185 Man-Machine Interface The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interf ace (MMI) that is primar ily used for T1 link perf or mance monitor ing and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alar m notification, T1 link performance repor ting and fault isolation testing. The interf ace is accessed through connect[...]

186 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Characteristics Description Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit Distance to Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service Unit 0-199.6 meters (0–655 feet) T able 81 "Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page 186) provides a technical summar [...]

Electrical specifications 187 The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V , –15 V , and +5 V from the backplane . One NT8D06 P eripheral Equipment P ow er Supply ac or NT6D40 P eripheral Equipment P ow er Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of eight Lineside T1 cards. Ta b l e 8 3 Lineside T1 card - power required Voltage Current (max.) + 5.0 V dc 1[...]

188 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Ta b l e 8 5 Lineside T1 card - en vironmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature-normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient Operating temperature-short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient Operating humidity-normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) Operating humidity-sho[...]

Installation and configuration 189 5 Configure the Lineside T1 card through the system softw are and verify self-test results. 6 V erify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional). —End— Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is cov ered in "QPC43 P eripheral Signaling card" (page 104) . Installation and configurat[...]

190 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page 192) through Ta b l e 9 0 "Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 194) . When the line-side T1 card is or iented as shown in Figure 32 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip s[...]

Installation and configuration 191 Figure 32 Lineside T1 card - T1 pr otocol dip switch locations T1 framing The Lineside T1 card is capable of interf acing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection f or this dip s witch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment suppor ts. T1 coding The Li[...]

192 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards DSX-1 length Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired local CPE, or the T elco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection f or this dip switch position based on this distance. Line supervision on T1 failure This[...]

Installation and configuration 193 Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection 3–6 XPEC Address for the Lineside T1 card See Table 88 "Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6)" (page 193) 7 Not Used Leave Off 8 Reserved for SL-100 use Leave Off Ta b l e 8 8 Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip swit[...]

194 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection 3–5 CPE or CSU distance See Table 90 "Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 194) 6 Line processing on T1 link failure On = On-hook Off = Off-hook 7 Daisy-chaining to MMI On = Yes Off = No [...]

Installation and configuration 195 Figure 33 Lineside T1 card - T1 pr otocol dip switch locations Line Supervisor y Signaling protocol As described in "P ower requirements" (page 323) , the Lineside T1 card is capable of suppor ting loop star t or ground star t call processing modes. Make the selection f or this dip s witch position base[...]

196 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • The address of the shelf in which the card resides These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; howe ver the address of the shelf must be set by this dip s witch. The shelf address dip s [...]

Installation and configuration 197 MMI Master or Slave This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a sla ve in the MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the sl[...]

198 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On Ta b l e 9 3 Lineside T1 card - T1 Switc h 2 (S2) dip s[...]

Installation and configuration 199 Distance S2 Switch Position 3 S2 Switch Position 4 S2 Switch Position 5 400–533 Off Off On 534–655 Off Off Off Installation This section descr ibes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card. When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies tw o card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE module. When i[...]

200 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies tw o card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 Intelligent P eripheral Equipment (IPE) Module. When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, deter mine the vintage le vel module. If the 25-pair I/O connectors are par tially split betw[...]

Installation and configuration 201 Vintage levels cabling 16 por ts F or modules with vintage lev els that cabled 16 por ts to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed into the f ollowing card slot pairs: Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14 The Lineside T1 card canno[...]

202 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14 The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the f ollowing card slot pairs: Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14 and 15 If the Lineside T1 card [...]

Installation and configuration 203 The Lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the Lineside T1 card to the I/O panel are m[...]

204 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Usually , the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other e xternal devices through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable . See Figure 36 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 211) . This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plu[...]

Installation and configuration 205 Figure 34 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

206 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 35 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable 3 T ur n over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 ter minal equipment. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard [...]

Installation and configuration 207 —End— The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row b y 2-column arra y of pins. T able 97 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 207) sho ws the I/O pin designations f or the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O pa[...]

208 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T able 98 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts" (page 208) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable . Ta b l e 9 8 Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts I/O pane connec tor pin Lead designations NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O connector pin Linesid[...]

Installation and configuration 209 at the T elco demarc, the CSU , or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the f ar end of the carr ier f acility . External alarm connections P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alar m hardware. Pl[...]

210 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Procedure 13 Connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal Step Action F ollow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (to wards MMI terminal) to one of the COM por ts on the back of any TTY[...]

Installation and configuration 211 Figure 36 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI T o make the connections at the MDF , follo w this procedure: Step Action 1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair f emale-connector ized cross-connect tail star ting with the first tip and ring pair of the Lineside T1 mo[...]

212 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row b y 2-column arra y of pins. T able 99 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 212) sho ws the I/O pin designations f or the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/[...]

Installation and configuration 213 T able 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts" (page 213) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable . T able 100 Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts I/O Panel Connector Pin Lead Designations NT5D13 AA Lineside T1 I/O Connec tor Pin Lineside T1 cable co[...]

214 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T1 connections T1 signaling f or all 24 channels is transmitted ov er P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as shown in T able 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts" (page 213) . Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the T1 link. T1 transmit and receiv e pairs m[...]

Installation and configuration 215 The MMI (descr ibed in detail in "Functional descr iption" (page 391) ) monitors the T1 link f or specified perf or mance criteria and repor ts on problems detected. One of the wa ys it can repor t inf or mation is through this external alar m connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s micropro[...]

216 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal). 3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards. 4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (aw ay from MM[...]

Installation and configuration 217 to talk on the b us, b ut rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled "control 1" are reserved f or future use. As with the e xter nal alar m connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelv es, can be link ed to one MMI ter mi[...]

218 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 38 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI —End— T erminal configuration F or the MMI ter minal to be able to comm unicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interf ace characteristics must be configured to the follo wing: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the se[...]

Installation and configuration 219 F or the MMI ter minal to be able to comm unicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interf ace characteristics must be set to the follo wing: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of s witch position 1 of Switch 1 • Character width – 8 bits • P arity bit – none • Stop bits – one • Soft[...]

220 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Item TN T1 Channel Number Motherboard 5 6 Motherboard 6 7 Motherboard 7 8 Motherboard 89 Motherboard 91 0 Motherboard 10 11 Motherboard 11 12 Motherboard 12 13 Motherboard 13 14 Motherboard 14 15 Motherboard 15 16 Daughterboard 01 7 Daughterboard 11 8 Daughterboard 21 9 Daughterboard 32 0 Daughterbo[...]

Installation and configuration 221 equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be cross-ref erenced to the corresponding card unit number . This mapping is shown in T able 102 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page 221) . T able 102 DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping TN T1 Channel Number Motherboard 01 Motherboard 12 Moth[...]

222 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards OSP <CR> and against FTR respond: ISP <CR> The Lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP f or both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect super vision, also known as cut-off disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. T er minating calls are inc[...]

Clocking Requirement 223 goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled b y the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Clocking Requirement The clocking f or NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interf ace card in CS1000 Rls 5.0 system is as follo ws: • Lineside T1 cards are clock maste[...]

224 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 39 MGC DECT Clock Reference Cab le Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Step Action 1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Ref erence Cable to the A UI por t of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 40 "MG1000 chassis" (page 224) shows the A UI por t of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 40 MG1[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225 Figure 41 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter f or Option 11C (NTD W63AAE5) • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 • Connect the MGC DECT Cloc k Ref erence Cable (NTD W67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter . Fig[...]

226 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards This section descr ibes the features of MMI and e xplains how to configure and use the MMI fir mware. The MMI provides the f ollowing maintenance features: • def ault and reconfigurable alar m parameters • notification of T1 link problems by activ ating alar ms • Repor ts on current and hi[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 227 When the first le vel of se verity is reached (alarm lev el 1), the MMI does the f ollowing: • activates the e xternal alar m hardware • lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLO W ALARM) • displa ys an alar m message on the MMI terminal • creates entr y in the [...]

228 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards When the first le vel of se verity is reached (alarm lev el 1), the MMI does the f ollowing: • activates the e xternal alar m hardware • lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLO W ALARM) • displa ys an alar m message on the MMI terminal • creates entr y in the [...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 229 It retains the T1 performance statistics f or the current hour , and for each hour f or the pre vious 24 hours. Descr iptions of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to repor t on them and clear them can be f ound in "P erf or mance counters and repor ting" (pa[...]

230 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards where the f our-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip s witch positions (dip s witch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 software), plus the tw o-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For e xample, to lo[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 231 • LTI:ss cc> f or multi-card installations, where ss represents the two-digit address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address Basic commands MMI commands can now be e xecuted. There are sev en basic commands that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are: [...]

232 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Command Description AE Alarm Enable Enables all alarms. CA Clear Alarm Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate and frame slip counters. CAL Clear Alarm Log Clears the alarm log. CE Clear Error Clears the error counter for the T1. D A [P] Display Alarms [Pause][...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 233 Command Description SA Set Alarm parameters Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm duration. SC Set Clearing Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable . SD Set Date Sets date or verifies current date. ST Set time Sets time or verifies[...]

234 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Notation Used: CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - Optional | - Either/Or Each of these commands can be e xecuted b y typing the first letter of the command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter of the s[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 235 Command Description DP Display Performance Displays performance counters for the current hour. D S [P] Display Status [Pause] Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and what alarm level is currently active. H or ? Help Displays the help screen L Login Logs into th[...]

236 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Alarm parameters The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the par ameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alar m activation le v els: • Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisf actor y condition an[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 237 Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10 Threshold to set alarm Allowable duration periods 10 –7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds 10 –8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds 10 –9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds The duration v alue is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 [...]

238 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards continues f or the designated duration per iod. The alar m finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected f or the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alar m (C A) command set is entered. In addition to bit errors, the S[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 239 Set Clearing Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disab le alar m self-clearing. Answ er Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clear ing? (YES or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the f actor y def ault condition), the system automatically clears alarms aft[...]

240 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Alarm parameters The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the par ameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alar m activation le v els: • Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisf actor y condition an[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 241 Alarm Threshold bit errors per second in Power of 10 Threshold to set alarm Allowable Duration Periods 10 –7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds 10 –8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds 10 –9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds The duration v alue is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 [...]

242 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards continues f or the designated duration per iod. The alar m finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected f or the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alar m (C A) command set is entered. In addition to bit errors, the S[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 243 Set Clearing Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disab le alar m self-clearing. Answ er Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clear ing? (YES or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the f actor y def ault condition), the system automatically clears alarms aft[...]

244 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Descriptions of the e xcessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be f ound in "Configuring parameters" (page 235) . Bit errors may activate either a lev el 1 or lev el 2 alar m. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a lev el 2 alar [...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 245 alarm le vel 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarm acknowledged." If the alarm condition still e xists, the alarm is declared again. Display Alarms A detailed repor t of the most recent 100 alar ms with time and date stamps can be display ed by ent[...]

246 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • F rame slip errors • Out of frame condition • Loss of signal condition • Blue alarm (AIS) condition Descriptions of the e xcessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be f ound in "Configuring parameters" (page 235) . Bit errors may activate either a lev el 1 or [...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 247 Clear Alarm The Clear Alar m (C A) command set clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alar m hardware is deactivated (the contact nor mally open is reopened), the LED light goes out, an entr y is made in the alar m log of the date and time when the alar m is cleared, and line proces[...]

248 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook, Port 23 on hook P erformance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the perf or mance of the T1 link according to sev eral perf or mance cr iteria including errored, bursty , unav ailable , loss of frame and frame slip seconds. It registers the pe[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 249 Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Counter 2263 0 2263 2263 352 321 Each column, except the error counter , indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero e v er y hour on the hour . When these counters are reset to zero , the perf or mance counter values are put into t[...]

250 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Unav ailable seconds – unav ailable state star ts with 10 consecutive se verely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive se verely errored seconds (e xcluding the final 10 non-sev erely errored seconds). Se verely errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or more [...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 251 Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Counter 20:00 139 0 129 139 23 162 19.00 0 0 0 0 00 18.00 0 0 0 0 00 17.00 0 0 0 0 00 16.00 0 0 0 0 00 Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P . Clear Error Reset the error counter to zero b y entering the Clear Error [...]

252 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards During a test, if an inv alid word is received, a failure peg counter is incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the test, the T est Results message indicates how many f ailures, if any , occurred during the test. T able 109 "MMI T ests" (page 252) shows whic[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 253 Figure 44 MMI external loopbac k test T est 3, network loopback, loops the receiv ed T1 data back tow ard the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 f ails, it indicates that the CPE de vice is defectiv e. If test 2 was not run and t[...]

254 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T ests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a "Stop T est" command is entered. T ests continue for the duration specified e ven if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a "Stop T est&[...]

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 255 Figure 46 MMI Local loopback test Figure 47 MMI External loopback test T est 3, network loopback, loops the receiv ed T1 data back tow ard the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 f ails, it indicates that the CPE de vice is defect[...]

256 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Applications The Lineside T1 interf ace is an IPE line card that provides cost-effectiv e connection between T1-compatib le IPE and a system or off-premise e xtensions over long distances. Some e xamples of applications where a Lineside T1 card can be interf aced to a T1 link are: • T1-compatible [...]

Applications 257 Figure 49 Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE The Lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise e xtensions to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the system). In this application, the analog telephone functionality is e xtended ov er T1 f acilities, pro viding a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (5[...]

258 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 50 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly , the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 51 "Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 259) . In this case, channel banks would not b[...]

Applications 259 Figure 51 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system The Lineside T1 card audio lev els must be considered when deter mining the appropriateness of an application.The Lineside T1 interface is an Intelligent P eripheral Equipment (IPE) line card that provides cost-eff ective connection between T1-compatib le peripheral equip[...]

260 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 52 Lineside T1 interface connection to peripheral equipment F or example , the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the Meridian 1 to a T1-compatible VR U . An example of this type of equipment is Nor tel Networks Open IVR system. In this wa y , the Mer idian 1 can send a call to the VR U [...]

Applications 261 Figure 53 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly , the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the Meridian 1 system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 54 "Lineside T1 interf ace connection to Norstar system" (page 262) . In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Nor[...]

262 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 54 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system Note: The Lineside T1 card audio lev els must be considered when determining the appropr iateness of an application. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright ©[...]

263 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface car ds Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 263) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 264) "Functional description" (page 268) "Electrical specifications" (page 272) "Installation and Configuration" (page 27[...]

264 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards • NT5D33A C/NT5D34AC – Enhanced Lineside E1 Interf ace (ELEI) cards The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but has been enhanced to allow the capability of transpor ting caller inf or mation using the propr ietar y signaling interf ace Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+). ELEI cards can operat[...]

Physical description 265 Faceplate The LEI f aceplate is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards. It occupies two card slots. The LE1 f aceplate has f our LEDs. See Figure 43 "MMI local loopbac k test" (page 252) Figure 55 "NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate" (page 265) (IPE v ersion), and Figure 56 "NT[...]

266 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 56 NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate The LEDs give status indications on the operations as descr ibed in Ta b l e 111 "LEI card LED operation" (page 267) . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-200[...]

Physical description 267 T able 111 LEI card LED operation LED Operation Status Line card Red alarm E1 near end Yellow alarm E1 far end Maint Maintenance The ST A TUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and theref ore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit f or two to five seconds as the [...]

268 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards inf or mation on E1 link maintenance. If the ter minal equipment detects a red alar m condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal e xceeds bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to the LEI, if the ter minal equipment suppor ts this feature . If a yel[...]

Functional description 269 Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-eff ective, all-digital connection between E1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, v oice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the ter minal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/2500-type) [...]

270 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receiv e signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop . The E1 interf ace circuit provides the follo wing: • An industr y standard CEPT (0 to 655 feet) in[...]

Functional description 271 — maintenance diagnostics • interf ace with the line card circuit — conv er ts on/off-hook, and r inger control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations f or each time slot in the E1 data stream, using channel associated signaling. • the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disab led by inst[...]

272 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 58 CAS+ compliance K ey Benefits of using CAS+ signaling (ELEI mode) over traditional A/B bit signaling (LEI mode) include: 1. Calling Line ID Presentation (CLIP) When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 or iginated call is directed to wards the CAS+ compliant system, Calli[...]

Electrical specifications 273 T able 112 LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Framing CRC-4 or FAS, only Coding AMI or HDB3 Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit Distance to LTU 0-199.6 meters (0-655 feet) P ower requirements T able 113 "LEI card - power required" (page 273) shows [...]

274 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Parameter Specifications Storage temperature –50 to + 70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Installation and Configuration Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps: Step Action 1 Configure the dip s witches on the LEI f or the[...]

Installation and Configuration 275 When the LEI card is or iented as shown in Figure 59 "LEI card - E1 protocol dip s witch locations" (page 276) , the dip s witches are ON when they are up , and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card f or the follo wing parameters: MMI port speed selection This dip s witch s[...]

276 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 59 LEI card - E1 pr otocol dip switch locations Line supervision on E1 failure This setting deter mines in what state all 30 LEI por ts appear to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Mer idian 1 in case of E1 failure . P or ts can appear as either in the "on-hook" or "off-hook" sta[...]

Installation and Configuration 277 Daisy-Chaining to MMI If two or more LEIs are installed and the MMI used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI ter minal or modem. Make the selection for this dip s witch position based on how many LEIs are being installed. MMI Master or Slave This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the [...]

278 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards T able 116 LEI card - signaling-type dip switch settings Switch #1 Characteristic Selection Position 2 Position 8 Loop start OFF OFF Ground start ON OFF Australian P2 OFF ON Signaling Type Table ON ON T able 117 LEI card - XPEC address dip s witch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 [...]

Installation and Configuration 279 T able 118 LEI car d - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switc h settings Characteristic Selection Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled CRC-4 Enabled 1 ON OFF OFF E1 coding AMI HDB3 2 ON OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 5 OFF OFF Line processin[...]

280 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Characteristic Selection Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default Line processing on E1 link failure On-hook Off-hook 6 ON OFF OFF Daisy-chaining to MMI YES NO 7 ON OFF OFF MMI master or slave Master Slave 8 ON OFF ON After the card has been installed, displa y the dip switch settings using th[...]

Installation 281 T able 120 LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level por t cabling Vintage Level Number of ports cabled to I/O panel NT8D37BA 30 ports NT8D37DE 16 ports NT8D37EC 30 ports A vailab le and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module If installing the LEI into an NT8D37 IPE module, the card slots av ailable depend on the vintage l[...]

282 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards the connection of the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card carrier and maintenance e xter nal I/O cable at the IPE and CE module I/O panel connector f or card slots that are otherwise restr icted. Alternatively , all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D3[...]

Installation 283 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI ter minal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4 connector f or MMI daisy chaining. The Tx marking on the adapter at P2 is the LEI output. The E1 data stream coming from the netw or k into the LEI connects at the Rx coaxial connect[...]

284 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards T able 122 LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts I/O Panel Connector Pin Lead Designations LEI Connector Pin LEI Cable Connector to External Equipment 1 E1 Tip Receive data 11 DB15 male to E1 (P2). LEI is CPE transmit and receive to network 26 E1 Ring Receive data 3 2 E1 Tip Transmit data 1 27 E1[...]

Installation 285 F or 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted ov er P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and out two coaxial connectors Tx (tr ansmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be tur ned over betw een th[...]

286 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards or more cards to the MMI" (page 287) . Cards can be located in up to 15 separate IPE shelv es. Star t with any card slot in the IPE shelf and connect to any other card slot. Connected card slots do not need to be consecutive. Procedure 14 Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal Step Act[...]

Installation 287 Figure 60 LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI T erminal configuration F or the MMI ter minal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interf ace characteristics must be set to: • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width – 7 bits • parity bit – mar k • stop bits – one • software handshak e (XON/X[...]

288 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards All 30 E1 channels carr ied by the LEI are individually configured using the analog (500/2500-type) T elephone Administration program LD 10. Use T able 123 "Card unit number to E1 channel mapping" (page 288) to determine the correct unit number and Software Input/Output Ref erence — Adm[...]

Installation 289 Item TN E1 Channel Number Daughterboard 42 2 Daughterboard 5 23 Daughterboard 62 4 Daughterboard 7 25 Daughterboard 82 6 Daughterboard 92 7 Daughterboard 10 28 Daughterboard 11 29 Daughterboard 12 30 Daughterboard 13 31 Disconnect supervision The LEI suppor ts f ar-end disconnect super vision by opening the tip side toward the term[...]

290 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Clocking Requirement The clocking f or NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interf ace card in CS1000 Rls 5.0 system is as follo ws: • Lineside E1 cards are clock master of their E1 link, which has a clock accuracy requirement of +/-50ppm • MGC does not provide a backplane clock with +/-50ppm accuracy at freerun [...]

Clocking Requirement 291 Figure 61 MGC DECT Clock Reference Cab le Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Step Action 1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Ref erence Cable to the A UI por t of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 62 "MG1000 chassis" (page 291) shows the A UI por t of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 62 MG1000 chassis 2 In the Opti[...]

292 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 63 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter f or Option 11C (NTD W63AAE5) • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 • Connect the MGC DECT Cloc k Ref erence Cable (NTD W67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter . Fig[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 293 terminal for the MMI. The follo wing sections descr ibe the options availab le through the LEI’s MMI terminal and explain how to set-up , configure, and use the MMI. The MMI provides the f ollowing maintenance features: • configurab le alar m parameters • E1-link problem indicator • curre[...]

294 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 1, depending on how the dip s witch for line processing is set (dip s witch 2, position 6). See T able 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279) . If the MMI detects E1-link failures f or any of the other conditions monitored (out-of-frame, e xcess frame slips, loss-[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 295 F or multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by entering L <address>, where the four-digit address is a combination of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip s witch positions on the card Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot t[...]

296 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 65 HELP (H, ?) screen Each of these commands can be ex ecuted by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered b y enter ing the first letter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of the second word or b[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 297 Command Description DP Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour. D S(P) Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) Ho r? [...]

298 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Set Date V erify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D) command. The MMI then displa ys the date it has registered. Enter a new date or hit Enter to leav e it unchanged. The date is entered in the "mm/dd/yy" f or mat. Set Alarm The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the paramet[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 299 Note: The error-rate threshold f or a lev el 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a le vel 1 alar m. Remember that the numbers being represented are negative numbers . Since 3 represents –3, and 4 represents –4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does. T able 125 E1 bit er[...]

300 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards A hea vy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quic kly than100 seconds. This causes the alar m to be declared sooner . An alar m condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold dur ing the corresponding duration perio[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 301 Option Description Frame Slip Threshold Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5. Frame Slip Duration Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is rese[...]

302 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 66 Set Simple (S S) no screen Figure 67 Set Simple (S S) yes screen Set Mode At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the current signaling mode, either Default (A ustralian P2) or T able (of bit values.) Entering a <CR> accepts the current value, or the user can typ[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 303 • enter just the AB bits (which is copied to the CD bits) • enter a complete ABCD bit patter n • in the case of optional states, a ’N’ or ’n’ can be entered to indicate that the state is not needed Note that in D4 F raming f or E1, there are no CD bits, so they are ignored. The user i[...]

304 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Idle SEND – T his is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – T his is the value that the LEI e xpects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle state. This value is required. Blocking RECEIVE – T his[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 305 Incoming call Ring er ON SEND – This is the v alue that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that r inging voltage should be applied at the CPE. This v alue is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is i[...]

306 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Outgoing call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required. Outgoing call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the v alue that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has release[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 307 • Out of frame condition • Loss of signal condition • Blue alarm (AIS) condition Descriptions of the e xcessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions are f ound in "Configur ing parameters" (page 297) . Bit errors activate either a le vel 1 or lev el 2 alarm. The remainin[...]

308 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the e xter nal alar m hardware is deactivated (the contact nor mally open is reopened), the LED goes out, an entr y is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing ceases (f [...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 309 Figure 73 Display Status (D S) screen P erformance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the perf or mance of the E1 link according to sev eral perf or mance cr iteria including errored, bursty , unav ailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these cr iteria b[...]

310 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards to deter mine if an alar m condition has been corrected. Clear the error counter , wait a f ew minutes , and display the perf ormance to see if any errors occurred since the counter was cleared. The MMI display repor ts on these performance counters through the Display Performance (D P) or the Displ[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 311 The P ause command works the same for Displa y Histor y as it does for the other display commands. Simply enter DHP to see a repor t on the perf or mance counters, one screen at a time. Figure 75 Display History (D H) screen As with all Display commands, the P ause command can be used to displa y a[...]

312 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards terminate at the end of the time per iod or when a Stop Test command is issued. Only Stop Test stops a test with a duration selection of 99; howe v er , the STOP command ter minates a test set to any duration from one to 99. After enter ing the test number , a prompt similar to Figure 77 "T est[...]

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interf ace software 313 Figure 78 MMI Local loopback test T est 2, external loopback, applies an e xternal loopback to the E1 link. T est data is generated and received b y the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails , it indicates that the E1 link is def ective between the LEI and the e xter nal loopback [...]

314 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 80 MMI Network loopbac k test Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effectiv e connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise e xtensions ov er long distances. Some e xamples of applications where an LEI can be interfa[...]

Applications 315 Figure 81 LEI connection to IPE F or example , the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible V oice Response Unit (VR U). An e xample of this type of equipment is Nor tel Open IVR system. In this wa y , the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 can send a call to the VR U , and, because the LEI suppor ts analog (500/25[...]

316 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Note: Consider LEI audio lev els when deter mining the appropr iateness of an application. Figure 83 LEI connection to Norstar system Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

317 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem car d (XCMC) Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 317) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 318) "Functional description" (page 318) "Electrical specifications" (page 322) "Configuration" (page 323) Introduction The NT5D60[...]

318 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) F or information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Deliver y f eature, please refer to F eatures and Ser vices (NN43001-106-B). For administration and maintenance commands, see Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611). Physical description CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D3[...]

Functional description 319 System software then sends the CND inf or mation to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time , where it is stored in the message buff er . If the CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included in the CND memor y b uffer . Once a[...]

320 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 The CLASS Modem card is designed t[...]

Functional description 321 Once all of the CND inf or mation has been stored in the memor y buff er , the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inser ts a star t and stop bit to each ASCII character sent. The transmission of the calling par ty nam[...]

322 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical character[...]

Configuration 323 T able 131 CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Units per card 32 transmit only modem resources Transmission rate 1200 ± 12 baud The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network. P ower requirements The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc [...]

324 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or s witches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and repor ts that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the Cardlan interf ace. Software service changes On systems equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) o[...]

325 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Contents The f ollowing are the topics in this section: "Introduction" (page 325) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 326) "Functional description" (page 340) "Architecture" (page 350) "Operation" (page 355) Introduction This section contains information required to i[...]

326 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card D ANGER D ANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected directly to the Pub lic Switched Network, or other exposed plant networks. Such a connection should only be done using an isolating-type networking ter minating device that provides v oltage surge protection, such as a Line T [...]

Physical description 327 NT5D97 faceplate Figure 84 "NT5D97 f aceplate" (page 327) illustrates the faceplate la y out f or the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disab le s witch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 tr unk por t status LEDs; and six e xternal connectors. T able 135 "Exter nal connectors and LEDs" (page 328) [...]

328 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card T able 135 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designator Type Description Switch ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable switch Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 0 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller [...]

Physical description 329 • After power-up , bef ore the card is enabled. • When the ENET por t on the card is disabled by software . T runk Disable (DIS) LEDs T wo red LEDs indicate if the "trunk por t 0" or "trunk por t 1" por tions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the follo wing cases: • Upon reception of [...]

330 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Unit 1 Clk Connectors T wo RJ11 connectors for connecting: • Digital trunk unit 1 recovered cloc k to pr imar y or secondar y ref erence source on clock controller card 0. • Digital trunk unit 1 recovered cloc k to pr imar y or secondar y ref erence source on clock controller card 1. Connector J5 (TRK) A 9 p[...]

Physical description 331 System capacity and performance Physical capacity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the netw or k shelf. Each card suppor ts two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited b y the number of network loops, ph ysical capacity of the shelf, n umber of DTI2/PRI2 i[...]

332 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Voltage Source Current DDP2 (without NTBK51AA) DDP2 (with NTBK51AA) +12V Backplane 25mA 75mA -12V Backplane 25mA 75mA Total Power (Maximum) 15.6W 20.8W Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required f or internal and e xter nal NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional [...]

Physical description 333 — NTCK80A C — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable f ollows. E1 carrier cables NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable f or systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK por t (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males). Fig[...]

334 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Cable Name Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Pane pins 1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring White P1-8 P3-3 1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3 1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3 1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3 P3-5 1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3 P3-9 NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120W c[...]

Physical description 335 Cable Name Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Panel pins 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9 N/C NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120W cab le for connecting the TRK por t on the DDP2 f aceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Main Distribution F rame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The[...]

336 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable f or connecting the TRK por t on the DDP2 f aceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Line T erminating Unit (L TU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males). Figure 88 NTCK79AA T able 142 "NTCK79AA cable pins" (page 336) lists the pin attr ibutes f or the[...]

Physical description 337 Reference c lock cables The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03A C (4.0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting each of the CLK0 or CLK1 por ts on the DDP2 f aceplate to the primar y or secondar y source por ts on Clock Controller card 0 or 1. Figure 89 NTCG03AA/AB/A C/AD MSDL/D[...]

338 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card • NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • NTCK80A C (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable Figure 91 NTCK80AA/AB/A C/AD Cable diagrams Figure 92 "DDP2 cable f or systems with an I/O panel" (page 339) and Figure 93 "DDP2 cable f or systems without an I/O panel&qu[...]

Physical description 339 Figure 92 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

340 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 93 DDP2 cable f or systems without an I/O panel Functional description NT5D97 circuit car d locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the netw or k bus . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Rele[...]

Functional description 341 Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or remov ed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before inser tion. NT5D97 has a diff erent DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. R[...]

342 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 94 Dip switches f or NT5D97AA/AB T runk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance le vel and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Ref er to T able 144 "Impedance le vel and loop mode s witch settings" (page 343) . Nor tel Communicati[...]

Functional description 343 T able 144 Impedance level and loop mode switch settings Swit ch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting 1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm 2 Spare X 3 Spare X 4 Unit mode OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode T ransmission mode A per-trunk s witch (S4/S10) provides selection of the d[...]

344 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card T able 147 T runk interface impedance switch settings Description S8/S14 switch setting 75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF 120 ohm OFF OFF OFF ON Ring ground switches f or NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip s witches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to ground. Ref er to T able 148 "Ring ground s witch settings&quo[...]

Functional description 345 T able 150 "NTBK51AA daughterboard address select s witch settings" (page 345) shows the possib le selection of the NTBK51AA D-channel. T able 150 NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switc h settings Device Address Switch Setting 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON [...]

346 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card T able 151 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD Card Trunks 0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 ENB/DSB mounted on the face plate S1 Ring Ground S16 DPNSS S8 S9 MSDL S9 TX Mode S2 S10 S3 S13 S4 S14 LBO Setting S5 S15 Receiver Interface S6 S11 General Purpose S12 S7 Ref er to DIP switch locations in Figure 95 "[...]

Functional description 347 Figure 95 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

348 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card T runk interface switches f or NT5D97AD T runk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment. T able 152 General purpose switches f or NT5D97AD Switch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting S12_1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm S12_2 Spare X S12_3 Spare X S12_4 Unit mode OFF - Unit o[...]

Functional description 349 T able 156 T runk 1 switches Switch Function S7 General Purpose ...See Table 152 "General purpose switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S10 TX Mode ...See Table 153 "TX mode switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S13, S14 & S15 LBO ...See Table 154 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S11 RX Imp[...]

350 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card MSDL external car d T able 159 Switch settings for MSDL external card Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Use T able 160 "Switch setting for MSDL e xter nal card" (page 350) to set the card address. T able 160 Switch setting f or MSDL external card Switch Setting DNUM (LD 17) 1234 0 OFF OFF OFF [...]

Architecture 351 T racking mode In tracking mode , the DDP2 loop supplies an e xternal clock reference to a clock controller . T wo DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mode, with one defined as the primar y ref erence source f or clock synchronization, the other defined as the secondar y ref erence source. The secondar y ref erence acts as a back-[...]

352 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Reference c lock err ors CS 1000 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a cloc k controller or reference-cloc k error has occurred. (The inter val of this check can be configured in LD 73). In trac king mode, at any one time , there is one active cloc k controller which is trac king on one re[...]

Architecture 353 Clock configurations Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system. A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive ref erence clocks from two sources ref erred to as the primar y and secondar y sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2 cards such as the NT8D72B[...]

354 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card T able 162 Clock Contr oller options - description Clock Option Notes Option 1 This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 97 "Clock[...]

Operation 355 Figure 97 Clock Contr oller - Option 1 Operation The f ollowing discussion describes possib le scenar ios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configur ation. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 St[...]

356 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 98 Clock Contr oller - Option 2 Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 357 Figure 99 Clock Contr oller - Option 3 Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

358 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 100 Clock Contr oller - Option 4 Case 1 - The two por ts of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced b y a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One por t of the QPC414 card [...]

Operation 359 CA UTION The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be worn before handling circuit cards. F ailure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the circuit cards. Procedure 15 Installing the NT5D97 Step Action 1 Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to be installed. The NT5D97 can be installe[...]

360 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card 10 If required, designate connecting bloc ks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 11 If required, install a Network Channel T er minating Equipment (NCTE). or Line T er minating Unit (L TU). 12 Add related office data into s witch memor y . 13 Enable faceplate s witch S1. This is the "Loop En[...]

Operation 361 CA UTION Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and DDP2 card must NO T be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves. 7 Remov e the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other circuit of a DDP2 card is in use,[...]

362 NT5D97 Dual-por t DTI2 PRI2 card • The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is suppor ted by LD 96. Note: The MSDL self-test is not applicab le to the NTBK51AA D-Channel daughterboard. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

363 NT5K02 Fle xible Analog Line car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 363) "Applications" (page 363) Introduction The NT5K02 Fle xible Analog Line card provides an interf ace f or up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones equipped with either ground button recall s witc[...]

364 NT5K02 Flexib le Analog Line card • NT5K02EA ground button, low-v oltage Message W aiting, analog line card typically used in Ger many • NT5K02F A ground button, low-v oltage Message W aiting, analog line card with 600 1 / 2 ter mination (A/D –4 dB, D/A–1 dB) • NT5K02GA same as NT5K02F A with a different loss plan (A/D –4 dB , D/A ?[...]

365 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 365) "MFC signaling" (page 365) "MFE signaling" (page 367) "Sender and receiver mode" (page 368) "Ph ysical specifications" (page 370) Introduction The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-freque[...]

366 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card • Level 2: used after Le vel 1 signaling is completed and may contain such inf or mation as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling par ties. Forward and bac kward signals When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a receiving XMFC/MFE card (f orward signaling), the receiving XMFC/M[...]

MFE signaling 367 Digit Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx backward direction DOD-Rx, DID-Tx 4 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz 5 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz 6 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz 7 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz 8 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz 9 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz 10 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 780 Hz + 660 Hz 11[...]

368 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Digit Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx Backward direction 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz — 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz — 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz — 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz — 8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz — 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz — 10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz — Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interf ace between the system’s CPU an[...]

Sender and receiver mode 369 T able 165 XMFC sender specifications Forward frequencies in DOD mode: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz Backward frequencies in DOD mode: 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.5 Hz from nominal Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels Level difference between frequencies: &l[...]

370 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card T able 167 XMFE sender specifications Forward frequencies in OG mode: 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz Forward frequencies in IC mode: 1900 Hz Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.25% from nominal Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels Level tolerance: +/- 1.0 dB Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation: 35 dB below l[...]

Physical specifications 371 Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

372 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

373 NT6D70 SILC Line car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 373) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 375) "Functional description" (page 375) Introduction The S/T Interf ace Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V Nor th Amer ica, NT6D70 BA –40 V Inter national) provides [...]

374 NT6D70 SILC Line card An NT6D70 SILC card can reside in a Media Gate way or Media Gatewa y Expansion. A maximum of f our NT6D70 SILC cards are suppor ted in a Media Gatew ay and Media Gate wa y Expansion. ISDN BRI ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data (D) channel. The BRI interface is ref erred to as a 2B+D con[...]

Functional description 375 Physical description The NT6D70 SILC card is a standard-size circuit card. Its f aceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inser ted in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. T[...]

376 NT6D70 SILC Line card A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system ov er a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own ph ysical ter mination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the specific ter minal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; [...]

Functional description 377 Other functions of the SILC are: • suppor t point-to-point and multi-point DSL ter minal connections • e xecute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interf aces • provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and Meridian 1 system bus f or mat • multiple x es 4 D-channels [...]

378 NT6D70 SILC Line card Micro Contr oller Unit (MCU) The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC . It has inter nal memor y , a reset and sanity timer , and a serial control interf ace. The memor y consists of 32 K of EPR OM which contains the SILC oper ating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interf ace s[...]

Functional description 379 The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and repor ts the configuration data and firmware v ersion of the card. The IPE bus interf ace connects an IPE b[...]

380 NT6D70 SILC Line card The clock con ver ter con verts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz cloc k to time the IPE b us channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The PE interf ace logic consists of a Card-LAN interf ace, a PE bus interf ace, a maintenance signaling channel interf ace, a digital pad, and a cloc[...]

Functional description 381 The power on the DSL comes from the SILC , which accepts –48 V from the IPE backplane and pro vides two watts of power to ph ysical ter minations on each DSL. It provides -48 V f or ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI ter minals and –40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant ter minals. The total power used b y th[...]

382 NT6D70 SILC Line card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

383 NT6D71 UILC line car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 383) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 384) "Functional description" (page 384) Introduction The NT6D71 U Interf ace Line card (UILC) suppor ts the OSI physical la yer (La yer 1) protocol. The UILC is an AN[...]

384 NT6D71 UILC line card to connect ISDN BRI-compatible ter minals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the CS 1000. For more inf or mation on ISDN BRI, see "ISDN BRI" (page 374) . A UILC can reside in a Media Gatewa y or Media Gatew ay Expansion. A maximum of f our UILCs are suppor ted in a Media Gatewa y and Media Gatew ay Expansion.[...]

Functional description 385 • perf or m activation and deactiv ation of DSLs • provide loopbac k control of DSLs Each U interf ace provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and suppor ts one ph ysical ter mination. This ter mination ma y be to a Network T er mination (NT1) or directly to a single U interf ace ter minal. Normally this physical te[...]

386 NT6D71 UILC line card The memor y consists of 32 K of EPR OM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interf ace selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU . The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the U transceiv ers. The MCU[...]

Functional description 387 The IPE b us interface connects one IPE b us loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification inf or mation from the system CPU to the UILC MCU . The signaling information also c[...]

388 NT6D71 UILC line card The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and repor ts the configuration data and fir mware version of the card. The PE b us interf ace connects one PE bus[...]

389 NT6D80 MSDL car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 389) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 390) "Functional description" (page 391) "Engineering guidelines" (page 396) "Installation" (page 401) "Maintenance" (page 408) "Replacin[...]

390 NT6D80 MSDL card Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of por ts suppor ted by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards. Since each MSDL has four por ts, representing a single device , a system can suppor t as many as 16 MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 por ts. [...]

Functional description 391 Functional description Figure 102 "MSDL bloc k diagram" (page 392) illustrates the MSDL functional bloc k diagram. The MSDL card is divided into f our major functional bloc ks: • CPU bus interf ace • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) • Memor y • Serial interface T wo processing units ser ve as the foundation f[...]

392 NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 102 MSDL bloc k diagram Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Functional description 393 Micro Pr ocessing Unit (MPU) The MPU , which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor , coordinates and controls data transf er and por t addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system.Pr ioritized interr upts tell the MPU which tasks to perf or m. Memory The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memo[...]

394 NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 103 "MSDL functional block diagr am" (page 395) shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform. It illustrates operation routing from the CPU , through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the MSDL controls functions on p[...]

Functional description 395 Figure 103 MSDL functional block diagram Data flow The MSDL transmit interface , managed b y the MSDL handler , sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interf ace receives pac ketized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buff er on the MSDL. The transmit buff er transpor ts these messages to the approp[...]

396 NT6D80 MSDL card The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to comm unicate with the system. The MSDL card receives pac ketized data from the I/O equipment ov er the MSDL por ts. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent to the appropriate function. The flow control mechanism provides an order ly exchange of transmit and receive messag[...]

Engineering guidelines 397 The MSDL card addresses are set using decimal switches located on the card. These s witches can select 100 unique card addresses from 0 to 99. An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because of truncated address decoding by the other cards. F or example , if a DCHI por t is set to address 5, it’s[...]

398 NT6D80 MSDL card T able 171 Asynchr onous interface specifications Parameter Specification Configured Data bit, parity 7 bits even, odd or no parity, or 8 bits no parity Software Data rate 0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, and 38.4 kbps Software Stop bits 1 (default), 1.5, 2 Software Transmission Full Duplex N/A Interface RS-232 Software R[...]

Engineering guidelines 399 Pin Signal name EIA circuit CCITT circuit DTE DCE 2 Transmit Data (TX) BA 103 X 3 Receive Data (RX) BB 104 X 4 Request to Send (RTS) CA 105 X 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 X 7 Signal Ground (SG) AB 102 —— 8 Carrier Detect (CD) CF 109 X 15 Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) DB 114 X 17 Serial Cl[...]

400 NT6D80 MSDL card Pin Signal Name EIA Circuit DTE DCE 15 Transmit Signal Timing (TSTa) DBa X 16 Receive Data (RXb) BBb X 17 Receive Signal Timing (RSTa) DDa X 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD X 23 Terminal Timing (TTa) DAb X 24 Terminal Timing (TTb) DAa X Implementation guidelines The f ollowing are guidelines f or engineer ing and managing MSDL [...]

Installation 401 A stable ambient operating temperature of appro ximately 22 C (72 F) is recommended. The temperature diff erential in the room should not exceed ±3 C (±5 F). The inter nal power supply in each module provides DC po wer f or the MSDL and other cards. P ower consumption and heat dissipation f or the MSDL is listed in T able 175 &qu[...]

402 NT6D80 MSDL card DCE switch DTE switch Interface Comment OFF ON RS-422 DTE All switches configured ON OFF RS-422 DCE All switches configured ON ON N/A Not allowed Figure 104 MSDL switch setting example Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Ne[...]

Installation 403 Installing the MSDL card Procedure 17 Installing the MSDL card Step Action T o install an MSDL card f ollow these steps: 1 Set De vice Number S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its card-loc king devices . Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card loc king devices and lift the loc king de vice out and aw ay from the card. Be careful not to t[...]

404 NT6D80 MSDL card Cable requirements The MSDL card includes f our high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) f emale connectors f or por ts and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector f or the monitor por t. See Figure 105 "MSDL cabling" (page 405) for a diagr am of the MSDL cabling configur ation. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the [...]

Installation 405 Figure 105 MSDL cabling Note: The choices of cab le to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. F or example , the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v .35, a customized or e xter nal vendor cable is required. T able 177 Cable types Function Cable type Cable length DCH[...]

406 NT6D80 MSDL card Cable installation When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment required for the selected operation. PRI trunk connections D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI trunk card. Refer to ISDN Primar y Rate Interf ace: F eatures (NN43001-569) f or a complete discussion of PRI and [...]

Installation 407 3 Route the cable to the rear of the module next to the I/O panel. 4 Plug the DB25 male connector end of a cable into a DB25 f emale connector at the back of the I/O panel. 5 Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners . 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 f or each connection. —End— MSDL planning form Use the follo wing plann[...]

408 NT6D80 MSDL card Sample 2 AML 3 RS-232 DCE NTND27AB 3 Spare RS-232 Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading ne w versions of peripheral software. These activities are perf or med by an authorized person such as a system administrator . T roubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem[...]

Maintenance 409 Figure 106 MSDL states A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409) ). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and st[...]

410 NT6D80 MSDL card The system disab les the MSDL if the card: • e xhibits an overload condition • does not respond to system messages • is remov ed • resets itself • encounters a f atal error • is frequently system disabled and recovered When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates wh y the MSDL is disabled. The substates are[...]

Maintenance 411 System controlled maintenance Built-in diagnostic functions constantly monitor and analyze the system and individual card, performing the following oper ations: • using autorecovery to automatically correct a temporarily faulty condition and maintain the system and its components • printing information and error messages to indi[...]

412 NT6D80 MSDL card Enabling the MSDL Enter ENL MSDL x to enable the MSDL manually . If the MSDL base code has not been previously downloaded or if the card v ersion is different from the one on the system disk, the software is do wnloaded and the card is enabled. T o f orce software download and enable the card, enter ENL MSDL x FDL . This comman[...]

Maintenance 413 Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configur ation errors that occur during installation or hardware f aults resulting from component failure during operation. See "Symptoms and actions" (page 415) for more inf or mation on problem symptoms and required responses. Isolate MSDL faults using the dia[...]

414 NT6D80 MSDL card 3 If the card has been disabled by the system, disable it manually with DIS MSDL x . Ta b l e 4 Inv oke self-testing with the SLFT MSDL x command. "Self-testing the MSDL" (page 412) If self-tests f ail, replace the card. If self-tests pass, tr y to enable the card again, as in step 2. If the card does not enable , not[...]

System disabled actions 415 10 Connect the cables to the MSDL f aceplate connectors. 11 At the . prompt in the LD 37 program, type ENL MSDL x ALL and press Enter to enable the MSDL and its oper ations. If the red LED on the MSDL tur ns off, the MSDL is functioning correctly . Since self-tests were not inv oked, no result message appears. 12 T ag th[...]

416 NT6D80 MSDL card Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system. Action: Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly. Verify that the[...]

System disabled actions 417 MSDL 10: SYS DSBL—SELFTEST PASSED NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE DNLD 5 TIMES SDI 10 DIS PORT 0 AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 12 DIS PORT 2 AML 13 DIS PORT 3 Error messages usually indicate the problem in this case. See "Maintaining the MSDL" (page 410) . SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS F AILED Cause: The card [...]

418 NT6D80 MSDL card Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL ports are handling excessive traffic. By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to "Maintaining the MSDL" (page 410) . If the problem persists, place the card in the manuall[...]

419 NT7D16 Data Access car d Content list The f ollowing are the topics in this section: "Introduction" (page 420) "F eatures" (page 420) "Controls and indicators" (page 421) "Dialing operations" (page 422) "Operating modes" (page 426) "K eyboard dialing" (page 453) "Ha yes dialing&qu[...]

420 NT7D16 Data Access card Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (D AC) is a data interf ace card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-P or t Interf ace Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchronous Interf ace Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 D A C to work with the RS-232-C interface , the RS-422 interf a[...]

Controls and indicators 421 Controls and indicator s The LEDs on the D A C faceplate indicate the status mode f or each por t. Figure 107 "NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate" (page 423) shows the NT7D16 D A C f aceplate. Card status The LED at the top of the faceplate is unlabeled. This LED is: • off: if one or more por ts are enabled ?[...]

422 NT7D16 Data Access card Dialing operations The D AC suppor ts both ke yboard and Hay es dialing sequences. The f ollowing discussion concer ns f eatures common to both dialing modes. P or t firmware in idle state The por t fir mware is considered idle when it is e xpecting one of the allowed autobaud characters. The idle state is identified [...]

Dialing operations 423 Figure 107 NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate Call Set-up abor t The user ma y abandon the call during the dialogue phase using one of the f ollowing methods: • T erminal off-line This method is useful for RS-232-C interf ace only . The equipment drops Data T er minal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle Nor tel Communication Ser[...]

424 NT7D16 Data Access card connection. F or e xample, if the equipment is turned off, the D A C inter prets that signal as an idle connection. • Long break The user sends a break (transmit line held in the OFF or SP A CE state) for more than 1.2 seconds. The break is not transmitted to the f ar end. At the end of the long break, the D A C por t [...]

Dialing operations 425 Wire test mode The D A C allows f or the EIA signaling leads to be tested to facilitate installation and troubleshooting. This f eature can be inv oked through the ser vice change downloaded parameters, or b y setting the appropr iate front panel s witch. Wire test mode only oper ates when the por t is idle. The leads are cyc[...]

426 NT7D16 Data Access card The D A C maintains separate buff ers for k eyboard and Hay es dialing modes. Changes made to a given parameter in one mode do not affect that parameter in the other mode. When a dialing mode is selected, the D AC copies the corresponding dialing parameters into the activ e buff er . This buff er controls the call proces[...]

Operating modes 427 T able 179 D AC mode of operation selection Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline Type of device to be connected Group selection DEM PRM DTR HOT 0 (DTE) OFF "Host On" (Ri ng Indicator — RI) OFF Not Forced OFF Not Hotline Modem Pool inbound and o[...]

428 NT7D16 Data Access card Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline Type of device to be connected Group selection DEM PRM DTR HOT 6 (DTE) ON "KBD On" (No RI) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Gateway inbound and outbound (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON "K[...]

Operating modes 429 Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline Type of device to be connected Group selection DEM PRM DTR HOT 13 (DCE) ON "KBD On" (prompts on) OFF Not Forced On Hotline Terminal similar to ASIM when set to Not Forced DTR and Hotline 14 (DCE) ON "KBD [...]

430 NT7D16 Data Access card the call is dropped b y the D A C. If the modem tur ns DCD ON bef ore the 35-second timeout, the D AC v alidates the incoming call and prepares to accept <CR> from the remote modem f or autobaud. See Figure 108 "D AC to modem connectivity" (page 430) for more details. Figure 108 D AC to modem connectivity[...]

Operating modes 431 A uto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem is used f or outbound modem pooling. The modem should e x ecute auto-reset when the DTR lead goes OFF . As a result, the modem m ust reset all its internal parameters to the def ault values. This feature pre vents the users of the modem pool from modifying the modem?[...]

432 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 109 D AC to Modem Pool connectivity Mode 1 This mode should be selected when the D A C is connected to an auto-ans wer modem for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the D AC automatically e xecutes Hotline operation when RI is dr iven ON b y the modem. The following modem f eatures are required: A uto-answer [...]

Operating modes 433 The baud rate of the Hotline call is deter mined by s witches 6 and 8, and the system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only . Configuring modems for mode 1 Most dumb modems can be configured f or this mode. The modem must be able to auto-ans wer and use dynamic control of DCD as described in mode 0. Smar t mod[...]

434 NT7D16 Data Access card T o configure this modem, set the configuration s witches as follo ws: • s witches 3, 8, and 10 to DOWN position • all other s witches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using RJ-11 jack. Programing DA C for mode 2 in service change LD11 When used f or inbound or outbound Modem P ool only , the D AC can be [...]

Operating modes 435 • The equipment does not dr ive RI lead (optional, the D A C ignores this lead). • The equipment must drive DCD lead dynamically . • The equipment drives DSR lead (optional). • The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depending on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the D A C: • operates as a DTE • [...]

436 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 110 D AC to Gate way connectivity Mode 4 This mode should be selected when the D A C is connected to a gatew ay f or inbound and outbound operation. The characteristics of the gatewa ys to be used with this mode are: A uto-answer capability This f eature is required when the gate wa y is used f or inbound operatio[...]

Operating modes 437 Programing D A C for mode 4 in service change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gatewa y access, the D AC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gatew ay access , the D AC m ust be configured as R232. When the D AC is programmed as station hunting, outbound gatew ay access should be i[...]

438 NT7D16 Data Access card Dynamic control of DCD This f eature must be suppor ted by all gate ways to be connected to the D AC . It allows the gate wa y to drive the DCD lead ON when the data call is estab lished, and OFF when the data call is disconnected. The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the A UTB and BA UD parameters in LD 11[...]

Operating modes 439 Programing D A C for mode 7 in service change LD 11 The D AC must be configured as R232 (the A utodial feature is used f or this mode). The D AC m ust not be configured as an ADM tr unk. Selecting the proper mode for Host connectivity Select modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 when the D AC is connected to diff erent types of hosts (DTE). [...]

440 NT7D16 Data Access card incoming call. If the host drives the DTR lead ON all the time , incoming calls are alwa ys immediately ans wered and the RI lead is not tur ned ON by the D A C. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the D A C dr ives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be ca[...]

Operating modes 441 Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the D A C is connected to a host for inbound host accessing. The host in this mode is not required to monitor RI or drive DTR. This mode is similar to mode 8, except f or the follo wing: • The status of DTR lead is assumed to be alwa ys ON, e ven when the actual condition of that lead [...]

442 NT7D16 Data Access card Programing D A C f or mode 11 in ser vice change LD 11 The D AC must be configured as R232 (the A utodial feature is used f or this mode). The D AC m ust not be configured as an ADM tr unk. Selecting the proper mode for T erminal connectivity Select modes 12, 13, 14,and 15 when the D AC is connected to diff erent types[...]

Operating modes 443 The D AC driv es CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped or when control—Z is entered dur ing the idle state. In this case, the D A C drives those leads OFF f or 0.2 seconds and then ON. When the DTR lead is driven OFF by the terminal, the D AC does not e xecute autobaud nor responds to any command. Note: If the PB[...]

444 NT7D16 Data Access card Programing D A C f or mode 14 in ser vice change LD 11 The D AC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and Displa y commands are likely to be used. Mode 15 This mode provides a "vir tual leased line" and the meaning of the "Forced DTR" s witch is re-defined. This mode should be selec[...]

Operating modes 445 See T able 180 "Connect and disconnect protocol" (page 445) for connect and disconnect protocol. T able 180 Connect and disconnect protocol Mode of operation Interface application Comments Mode 0 Inbound and Outbound modem pools For inbound modem pools, most dumb modems may be used. For outbound modem pools, only smart[...]

446 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments DAC drops DTR if the remote modem sends a long break or three short breaks. The modem must drop DCD. Call disconnection (modem): Modem drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call. Modem drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more). Th[...]

Operating modes 447 Mode of operation Interface application Comments —The DAC ignores RI and DCD for about 2 seconds after releasing a call. This avoids problems with the Hayes 1200 modem. Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Use this mode with Hayes 1200 modem. Inbound Hotline modem pooling: The DAC operation is identical to mode[...]

448 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnection (DAC): DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gateway must drop DCD. DAC drops DTR if the DAC receives a long break or three short breaks. The Gateway must drop DCD. Call disconnection (Gateway): Gateway drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or m[...]

Operating modes 449 Mode of operation Interface application Comments Mode 6 Inbound and Outbound Gateway access (with forced DTR) Inbound and Outbound Gateway protocol: The DAC operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). The establishment of the outbound call does not require DCD to be driven ON [...]

450 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments DAC prepares to receive <CR> for autobaud. Host sends <CR> followed by other commands for establishing a data call (the DAC does not echo a command, nor does it send any prompt to the Host (blind dialing). When the data call is completely established, the DAC t[...]

Operating modes 451 Mode of operation Interface application Comments Disconnection is identical to mode 8. Mode 10 Host access for call origination and answering (with forced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The DAC operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is always considered ON, even when the Host is driving DTR OFF. Call d[...]

452 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments When terminal receives RI ON, it should respond by turning DTR ON. DAC answers when DTR goes ON and the local DM user is now transparently linked to the terminal. Terminal originating an outgoing data call: DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state. Terminal turns [...]

K eyboard dialing 453 Mode of operation Interface application Comments DTR ON, the DAC does not try to establish another Hotline call unless the terminal sends a <CR> while DTR is ON. Call disconnection: Disconnection is identical to mode 12. Mode 14 Terminal access for call origination and answering (with forced DTR) Terminal access for call[...]

454 NT7D16 Data Access card The f ollowing ke yboard dialing features are suppor ted with the D A C: • A utobaud from 110 to 19200 bps • A utopar ity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readab le on the data terminal dur ing the interactive dialogue mode • Originating calls to local and remote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • T[...]

K eyboard dialing 455 Prompts requiring a Y es or No answ er are ter minated by a question mar k (?), follo wed by a list of allowab le responses. The default response, if allowed, is br ack eted. Call abort In addition to the methods mentioned abov e, which are common to both Ha yes and k eyboard modes, k eyboard dialing suppor ts the f ollowing m[...]

456 NT7D16 Data Access card When the user enters the autobaud character , <CR>, and the dialing mode is Manual (not Hotline), the DA C sends the follo wing menu: <CR><LF><CR><LF><LF>ENTER NUMBER OR H (FOR HELP):<SP> If the user enters <CR>, the D A C presents this prompt again. When a number is entere[...]

K eyboard dialing 457 CALL CONNECTED . SESSION ST ARTS A utodial (A) The A utodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. The D AC automatically attempts to place a data call to the A utodial number : A <CR> CALLING xxxxxxx RINGING ANSWERED CALL CONNECTED . SESSION ST ARTS The currently stored A u[...]

458 NT7D16 Data Access card Both the Autodial and Speed Call commands can be changed with the Modify command (M). Additionally , the Speed Call number can be changed in the ser vice change. When this command is entered, the Modify menu appears. Modify Menu: A - Auto Number D - DCD Control L - Long Break M - Manual Answ er Q - Quit Modify Menu R - R[...]

K eyboard dialing 459 By entering R on the ke yboard, you enter the Remote Loopbac k Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disab le the Remote Loopback f eature. R <CR> Remote Loopback Disab led (or enabled, indicating current status) Remote Loopback (Y/N): <SP> Y <CR> or N <CR> Remote Loopback: Enabled [...]

460 NT7D16 Data Access card DCD Control: DynamicDCD Control: Forced On By entering L on the ke yboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to the follo wing prompts to enable or disable the detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal. L <CR> Long Break:Detected Ignored Detect Long Break? (Y/N): <SP> Y <CR> N [...]

K eyboard dialing 461 CTRL Z (Abor t K e yboard Dialing) Select: <SP> If a Ring Again request has already been placed, the D A C offers the option of ov err iding the pre vious request. RING AGAIN A CTIVE, REPLACE? (Y/N): <SP> Y <CR> RING A GAIN PLACED Primar y Commands Menu: A - A uto Dial C - Call D - Display M - Modify S - Spee[...]

462 NT7D16 Data Access card C - Call M - Modify D - Displa y CTRL Z (Abor t K e yboard Dialing) Select: <SP> Not in service When the D AC attempts a call to a DN that is not suppor ted, it sends you a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Autobaud character <CR> to initiate ke yboard dialing again. C<CR> ENTER NU[...]

Hay es dialing 463 • Character echo control • On-hook/off-hook control • Detect off-line escape sequence • Return to on-line • Initiate Remote Digital Loopback • T erminate Remote Digital Loopback • Modify S Registers S0 through S12 • Displa y S Registers S0 through S12 • Suppor t all S Registers except: S6, S7, S9, and S11 The Ha[...]

464 NT7D16 Data Access card The maximum number of characters is 43. This limit includes the A T prefix, and the record T er minator character , but does not include the ASCII space character . Echo Throughout the dialogue phase , the D AC echoes all user input. In RS-232-C modes 0, 1, 2, and 3, no inbound call messages are presented to the modem. [...]

Hay es dialing 465 T able 181 Hay es dialing result codes and messages Verbose code Numer ic code Description OK 0 Command(s) executed, no error CONNECT 1 Data call established, session starts RING 2 Inbound call presented NO CARRIER 3 Data call abandoned ERROR 4 Error in command line NO DIALTONE 6 System does not allow call to proceed BUSY 7 Far e[...]

466 NT7D16 Data Access card Dialing operation Like k eyboard dialing, the Hay es dialing commands allow the user to initiate a data call, as well as change cer tain dialing parameters . The commands ma y be entered in either upper or lower case, b ut must be the same case throughout the command line . Also the case m ust match the autobaud case. No[...]

Hay es dialing 467 Command Description ATEn Echo (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, commands echo back to terminal) ATTSP! Transparent mode Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return (<CR>) when the port is idle. Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return (<CR>) to execute it. F or the pur poses of this document, whe[...]

468 NT7D16 Data Access card T able 183 Allowable S registers S register Range Range units Supported Description S0 0–255 Rings Yes Number of rings to answer a system call (0 = manual answer) S1 0–255 Rings Yes Ring count for the current inbound system call S2 0–127 ASCII Yes Off-line escape sequence character S3 0–127 ASCII Yes Input/output[...]

Hay es dialing 469 OK Reset Hay es parameters All of the Hay es dialing parameters and S registers remain ev en after the data call is complete. Similar ly , if the dialing mode, k eyboard to Ha yes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The f ollowing command allows y ou to reset the parameters and S registers to the def [...]

470 NT7D16 Data Access card Parameter Value Description S3 13 Terminator character Carriage Return (<CR>) S4 10 New line character Line Feed (<LF>) S5 8 Back space character BS (<BS>) S6 2 Blind dial delay 2 seconds S7 30 Timeout for outbound call answer 30 seconds S8 2 Dial pause delay 2 seconds S9 6 Carrier detect response time [...]

Hay es dialing 471 RING RING RING CONNECT Issuing the On Hook command while the call is still ringing disconnects the incoming call. The D AC disconnects the call and notifies y ou with a NO CARRIER message. RING RING A TH0 NO CARRIER When the S0 register is set to 0, the D AC is set to manual answ er , and an inbound call must be ans wered with t[...]

472 NT7D16 Data Access card complete list of the parameters allowed f or each S Register , see T able 184 "Ha yes parameters and S register reset values" (page 469) descr ibing the S Registers. In the f ollowing e xample, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape Character defined in the S2 register . The example sho ws the [...]

Specifications 473 — 60 minutes • DDN: 1 to 7 digits (0–9) Operating parameters There are thir teen parameters configured in the system that are downloaded to the D AC . They are: • Dialogue parity — Space (OFF) — Mark (ON) —E v e n — Odd • DTR control — Dynamic (aff ected by call progress) — F orced ON • DCD control — D[...]

474 NT7D16 Data Access card — Disabled—On with DTR (nor mal) — Enabled—Off with DTR (modes 8 or 12, and no DTR f or 5 seconds) • A uto Baud — V ar iable (use auto baud rate) — Fix ed (use baud rate selection only) • Baud rate — 110 — 150 — 300 — 600 — 1200 — 2400 — 4800 — 9600 — 19200 • Operating mode — DCE —[...]

System database requirements 475 aff ect the operating parameters, this is useful to monitor and confir m por t settings. An additional parameter is listed in the uploaded inf or mation: por t interf ace mode (RS-232-C/RS-422). The interface is set b y the use of jumpers on the D A C , and cannot be altered by the ser vice change. System database [...]

476 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 114 Operating mode selection-RS422 Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

System database requirements 477 Figure 115 Operating mode selection-RS-232-C Note: W ar ning T one Denied (WTD) def aults if DT A is entered. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

478 NT7D16 Data Access card • If the D A C is used to call out through modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems connected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V .35 SADM, the D A C por t should be configured with a secondary DN, which has a single appearance. • The Vir tual k eys must be assigned as shown in T able 186 "Vir tual key a[...]

Installing the Data Access card 479 EIA DB-25 Pin Signal abbreviation Description DCE mode DTE mode CC 6 DSR Data Set Ready Out In AB 7 GND Signal Ground —— CF 8 DCD Carrier Detect Out In CD 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready In Out CE 22 RI Ring Indicator Out In Note: RS-422 leads supported are: Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). En vironmental The D A C[...]

480 NT7D16 Data Access card Large System In Large Systems, the D AC is fully suppor ted in IPE modules. These special slots on the D A C hav e 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution F rame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. The IPE slot suppor ts the first four por ts on the D A C if connections are made at the MDF . Most IPE modules can be upgr[...]

P or t configuration 481 T able 189 System option compatibility with the DA C System option Backplane code Backplane release Upgrade Maximum no. of ports/DAC supported Large Systems NT8D3701 3 and below No 4 Large Systems NT8D3701 4 and above Yes 6 P ort configuration Figure 116 "NT7D16 Data Access Card por t connectors" (page 482) show[...]

482 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 116 NT7D16 Data Access Card por t connectors Cabling Se ver al cabling schemes are possible f or both AILC and RILC modes. T ypical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cab les is shown in the T able 190 "RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF" (page 483) and Ta b l e 191 "RS-422 maximum line capac[...]

Cabling 483 T able 190 RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance 24 24 104 26 15 166 T able 191 RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance 24 24 2500 26 15 4000 Figure 117 "Cab ling to the data equipment" (page 484) sho ws the cabling choices av [...]

484 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 117 Cabling to the data equipment Figure 118 "RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks" (page 485) shows a connection through an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is recommended that f our wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to conv er t the RJ-11 or[...]

Cabling 485 Note: It is necessary to tur n ov er Receive Data and Send Data between the D A C and the AILU . This is done on the TN at the MDF . Figure 118 RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks Figure 119 "P atch panel lay out" (page 486) illustrates the patch panel. RS-232-C cables are used to connect the data equipment to the patch panel. This par ticul[...]

486 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 119 Patc h panel lay out Note: Use an octopus cable that f ollows the pinout of the D AC , such as QCAD318A (f emale) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin f emale-to-female gender con ver ter . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 200[...]

Backplane pinout and signaling 487 Figure 120 Octopus cabling Backplane pinout and signaling T wo 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors connect the card to the backplane . The detailed pinout configurations are listed in T able 192 "RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three D A C por ts" (page 488) and T able 193 "RS-232-C and R[...]

488 NT7D16 Data Access card T able 192 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for fir st three DA C ports I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no. RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus 1T 26 W-BL UNIT 0 TD0 2 RDA0 1R 1 BL-W RD0 3 RDB0 2T 27 W-O DTR0 20 SDA0 2R 2 O-W GND0 7 SDB0 Connector 3T 28 W-G DCD0 81 3R 3 G-W DSR0 6 4T 29 W-BR RI0 22[...]

Backplane pinout and signaling 489 I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no. RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus 12T 37 BK-O RI2 22 12R 12 O-BK CTS2 5 Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC. Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive Data; second pai[...]

490 NT7D16 Data Access card I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no. RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus 22T 47 V-O DTR5 20 SDA5 22R 22 O-V GND5 7 SDB5 Connector 23T 48 V-G DCD5 83 23R 23 G-V DSR5 6 24T 49 V-BR RI5 22 24R 24 BR-V CTS5 5 Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot. [...]

Configuring the Data Access card 491 Prompt Response Description OPE (NO) YES Operation parameter change PAR (SPAC) ODD EVEN MARK SPAC = space parity ODD = odd parity EVEN = even parity MARK = mark parity DTR (OFF) ON DTR settings, where: ON = forced DTR OFF = dynamic DTR This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232 HOT (OFF) ON Hotline If HOT = ON, th[...]

492 NT7D16 Data Access card Prompt Response Description PRM (ON) OFF Prompt mode, where: ON = prompt (Terminal) mode OFF = no prompt (Host) mode DEM (DCE) DTE Data Equipment mode This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232. DLNG (ENG) FRN Data port language, where: ENG = English FRN = Quebec French KBD (ON) OFF Keyboard dialing, where: ON = enabled OFF[...]

Configuring the Data Access card 493 Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or D AC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, y ou can print out the configured parameters f or each por t, or the entire D A C . This is useful to deter mine if any parameters ha ve been altered dur ing keyboard or Ha yes dialing modify procedures. LD 20 -[...]

494 NT7D16 Data Access card DBASE R-232 or R-422 UPLOAD R-232 or R-422 WIRE OFF OFF PBDO OFF OFF Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified. Connecting Apple Macintosh to the D A C The Apple Macintosh can be connected with twisted pair wire to a por t of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (D AC) to allow access to the switchi[...]

Upgrading systems 495 Figure 122 Macintosh to DA C connection-mini-8 DIN Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The D A C can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cabling changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made. F ollow this procedure to upg rade your cab ling. Y ou can upgrade the cab ling segment-by-segmen[...]

496 NT7D16 Data Access card Segment 1 Step Action 1 Leav e cable E as is in slot L4. 2 Mov e cable end F-3 to L5-3. 3 Remov e cable G from the backplane and connect ends G-1, G-2, and G-3 to L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3. 4 Add cable H to the I/O panel by connecting ends H-1, H-2, and H-3 to L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3. —End— Segment 2 Step Action 1 Leav e cab[...]

Upgrading systems 497 —End— Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cab le for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look lik e this: Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (new cable) L4 E L5 F L6 G L7 H (new cable) L8 K L9 L L10 M L11 N ([...]

498 NT7D16 Data Access card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

499 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 499) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 501) "Functional description" (page 506) "Electrical specifications" (page 519) "Connector pin assignments" (page 524) "Config[...]

500 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 por t NT8D02 Digital Line card is suppor ted in the Media Gatewa y and Media Gatew ay Expansion. Y ou can install this card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 is a 48 por t card suppor ted only in the Chassis system. It is based on the NT8D02 Digital Line car[...]

Physical description 501 The digital line card suppor ts voice only or simultaneous voice and data ser vice over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wir ing. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous ASCII terminal, or a PC acting as an asynchronous ASCII terminal, can be connected to the system through the [...]

502 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The f aceplate of the NTDK16BA digital line card is equipped with three light emitting diodes (LEDs). A red LED lights when the card is disabled. At power-up , this LED flashes as the digital line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully , the card is automatically enabled (if it is config[...]

Physical description 503 Figure 123 Digital line card - faceplate Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

504 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 124 Digital line card - faceplate The NT8D02 Digital Line Card circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. b y 10 in.) doub le-sided pr inted circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector . The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped wit[...]

Physical description 505 the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in softw are, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Figure 125 Digital line card - faceplate Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard R[...]

506 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiple xed voice , data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus ov er a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiple xed (TCM) digital link. Each digital [...]

Functional description 507 Figure 126 Digital line card - bloc k diagram NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiple xed voice , data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus ov er a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiple xed (TCM) digital link. Each[...]

508 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the f ollowing functions: • self-identification • self-test • control of card operation • status repor t to the controller • maintenance diagnostics The card also provides: • Ability to suppor t Digital sets and the Digital Con[...]

Functional description 509 Figure 127 NTDK16 DLC Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

510 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 128 Digital line card - bloc k diagram The NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interf aces. Each interface provides a multiple x ed voice, data, and signaling path to and from a digital ter minal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz Time Compression Multiplex e[...]

Functional description 511 Figure 129 "NT8D02 Digital Line Card - bloc k diagram" (page 511) shows a bloc k diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card. Each of these functions is descr ibed on the f ollowing pages. Figure 129 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram Functional description of the NT8D02 The di[...]

512 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data ter minal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database , for a total of 32 addressable por ts per card. The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the follo wing functions: • self-identification • self-test[...]

Functional description 513 The digital line card passes voice , data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data ov er the card LAN link. These interf aces are discussed in detail in the section "Intelligent P eripheral Equipment" (page 21) . The NT8D02 Digital Line Card passes voice , data, and signaling over DS-30X loops, and [...]

514 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and tak e down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interf ace circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages [...]

Functional description 515 The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and tak e down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interf ace circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the Call [...]

516 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Each digital telephone line ter minates on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transf ormer coupling and f oreign voltage protection betw een the TCM loop and the digital line interf ace circuit. It also provides batter y voltage f or the digital telephone. T o [...]

Functional description 517 — enabling/disab ling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interf ace control circuits for administration of line interf ace unit operation — maintenance diagnostics The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disab led by instructions from the NT8D01 control[...]

518 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards — enabling/disab ling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interf ace control circuits for administration of line interf ace unit operation — maintenance diagnostics The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disab led by instructions from the [...]

Digital line interface specifications 519 The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc f or use by the digital line interface circuits . The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the loop interf ace circuits. Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line card. This section li[...]

520 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards T echnical summary T able 196 "NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summar y" (page 520) provides a technical summar y of the digital line cards. T able 196 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary Characteristics NT8D02 DLC description NTDK16BA DLC description NTDK16AA DLC descriptio[...]

T echnical summar y 521 Characteristics Description Loop limits 0 to 1067 m (3500 ft.) with 24 AWG PVC cable (±15 V dc at 80 mA) Maximum ac Signal loss 15.5 dB at 256 KHz Maximum dc Loop resistance 210 ohms Transmitter output voltage: successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and –1.5 ± 0.15 V "0" bits 0 ± 50 mV T able 244 "E[...]

522 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards T able 199 Digital line card-po wer required Voltage Current (max.) ±5.0 V dc 150 mA +15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp –15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp The digital line card needs +15V DC ov er each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V , -15V , and +5V from the backplane . The line f eed interface can supply pow er to[...]

T echnical summar y 523 Foreign and surge v oltage protections In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card does, howe v er , hav e protection against accidental shor ts to –52 V dc analog lines. When the card is used to ser vice off-premise telephones,[...]

524 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards T able 202 Digital line card - envir onmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F) T able 203 "Digital line card - environmental specificati[...]

Connector pin assignments 525 T able 205 NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5[...]

526 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards T able 206 Digital line card - bac kplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B L[...]

Configuration 527 T able 207 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - backplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A L[...]

528 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Jumper and switc h settings The NT8D02 Digital Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or s witches. The card derives its address from its position in the bac kplane and repor ts that inf or mation back to the Call Server through the LAN Link interf ace. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card has no user-configur[...]

Configuration 529 Figure 131 Digital line card - jumper bloc k and switch locations V oice and data por ts are configured using LD 11. See Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 ser vice change instructions. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 Ma[...]

530 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 132 Digital line card - jumper bloc k and switch locations Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Configuration 531 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - jumper block and switch locations Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

532 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 133 Digital line card - jumper bloc k and switch locations Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

533 NT8D03 Analog Line car d Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface f or up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the follo wing functions: • control of card operation • card identification • self-test • status repor ting to the controller • maintenanc[...]

534 NT8D03 Analog Line card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

535 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 535) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 538) "Functional description" (page 541) "Connector pin assignments" (page 556) "Configuration" (page 558) Introduction The NT8[...]

536 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK suppor t µ -Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improv es perf or mance on long lines, par ticular ly f or lines used outside of a single-building en vironment. The NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card s[...]

Introduction 537 Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK suppor t µ -Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improv es perf or mance on long lines, par ticular ly f or lines used outside of a single-building en vironment. CA UTION Damage to Equipment If a modem is connected to a por t on the mes[...]

538 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card The NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line Card is functionally identical to the NT8D03 Analog Line Card, except it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current f eed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped with the Message W aiting feature . The NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting [...]

Physical description 539 Figure 134 Analog message waiting line card - faceplate The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot. The circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) pr inted circuit board. The analog message waiting line card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector . The backplan[...]

540 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card card through the MDF . See Communication Ser ver 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross-connect inf or mation. The f aceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Fi[...]

Functional description 541 The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line Card is equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled. At power-up , the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully , the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goe[...]

542 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Figure 135 "Analog message waiting line card - bloc k diagram" (page 543) shows a b lock diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are descr ibed in the f ollowing sections. Figure 136 "Analog message waiting line card - bloc [...]

Functional description 543 Figure 135 Analog message waiting line card - bloc k diagram Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

544 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Figure 136 Analog message waiting line card - bloc k diagram • transmission and reception of scan and signaling de vice (SSD) signaling messages ov er a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format • on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Ref[...]

Functional description 545 • 20-Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the station goes off-hook • synchronization f or connecting and disconnecting the r inging signal to zero crossing of ringing voltage • loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals f or diagnostic pur poses • correct initializat[...]

546 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card • connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activ ate message waiting lamps • lamp status detection • disabling and enab ling of selected units for maintenance Card interfaces The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data ov er DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN l[...]

Functional description 547 • signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card Microcontr oller The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the inter nal operation of the card and the ser ial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the follo wing: • repor ting to [...]

548 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card P ow er for lighting the message waiting lights is provided by either the peripheral equipment power supply or the r inging generator . Logic on the message waiting line card interrupts the –150 V dc signal at 1 Hz inter v als to provide a flashing message waiting light. T echnical summary or Electric[...]

Electrical specifications 549 Input impedance The impedance at tip and r ing is 600 ohms with a retur n loss of: • 20 dB f or 200-500 Hz • 26 dB f or 500-3400 Hz Input impedance The impedance at tip and r ing is 600 ohms with a retur n loss of: • 20 dB f or 200 – 500 Hz • 26 dB f or 500 – 3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-lin[...]

550 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card T able 213 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Car d frequency response Frequency Minimum Maximum 60 Hz 20.0 dB — 200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB 300 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3000 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3200 Hz –0.5 dB 1.5 dB 3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.0 dB Frequency response The loss values in T able 214 "NT8D09 Analog Mess[...]

Electrical specifications 551 Ringing voltage 86 V AC Signaling Loop start Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.5 V on tip at nominal -48 V battery) Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analo[...]

552 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not e xceed 20 dBmC . Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both e[...]

Electrical specifications 553 Frequency (Hz) Minimum (dB) Maximum (dB) 3000 –0.5 1.0 3200 –0.5 1.5 3400 0.0 3.0 P ower requirements T able 219 "P ow er requirements" (page 553) provides the power requirements f or the NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card. T able 219 P ower requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active [...]

554 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card T able 220 Analog message waiting line card - power requirements Voltage (+/–) Tolerance Idle current Active current Maximum +12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA +8.5 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA* 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA** 160 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 [...]

Electrical specifications 555 T able 222 P ower requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current Max + 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA + 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 320 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 m (Note 2) 160 mA –150.0 V dc 3[...]

556 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Overload level Signal le vels e xceeding +6.5 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distor tion in speech transmission. Overload level Signal le vels e xceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and r ing cause distor tion in speech transmission. Overload level Signal le vels e xceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip[...]

Connector pin assignments 557 T elephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog message waiting line card at the MDF using a wir ing plan similar to that used f or trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 137 "Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection e xample" (page 559) and T able [...]

558 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Configuration This section outlines the procedures f or configur ing the s witches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 138 "Analog message waiting line card - jumper bloc k and switch locations"[...]

Configuration 559 Figure 137 Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example This transmission profile change is used f or control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission parameters such as received v olume, echo , noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan f or the analog me[...]

560 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card T able 226 T ransmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The bac kplane is cab led to [...]

Configuration 561 Figure 138 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switc h locations T able 227 Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip * These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 [...]

562 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 18B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63[...]

Configuration 563 Figure 139 Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example Configuration This section outlines the procedures f or configur ing the s witches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line Card and configur ing the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 140 "Analog message waiti[...]

564 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Software service changes Individual line interf ace units on the NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line Card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) T elephone Administration progr am LD 10. The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the customer data bloc k using LD 15. See Softw[...]

Configuration 565 Figure 140 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switc h locations Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

566 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

567 NT8D14 Univer sal T runk car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 567) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 571) "Functional description" (page 576) "Operation" (page 585) "Electrical specifications" (page 676) "Connector pin assignments&quo[...]

568 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Y ou can install this card in any IPE slot.In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. Note: Each Media Gate wa y and Media Gatewa y Expansion can contain up to f our analog tr unk cards[...]

Introduction 569 trunk lines to the Meridian 1 switch. Each trunk interf ace is independently configurab le by software control using the T runk Administration progr am LD 14. The univ ersal tr unk card suppor ts the f ollowing trunk types: • Centralized A utomatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks • Central office (CO), F oreign Exchange (FEX[...]

570 NT8D14 Universal T runk card The NT8D14 Univ ersal T r unk card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gatew ay and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gatewa y Expansion. The NT8D14 Univ ersal T r unk card suppor ts the f ollowing trunk types: • Centralized A utomatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks • Central Office (CO), F[...]

Physical description 571 • Tie T wo-wa y Dial Repeating (DR) and T wo-wa y Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) • P aging (P AG) Note: All-call zone paging is not suppor ted. • Recorded Announcement (RAN). The Universal T runk Card also suppor ts Music, Automatic W ak e Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). T able 232 "Suppor te[...]

572 NT8D14 Universal T runk card The f aceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 141 "Universal trunk card - f aceplate" (page 573) . When an NT8D14 Universal T r unk card is installed, the LED remains lit for tw o to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED ?[...]

Physical description 573 Figure 141 Universal trunk car d - faceplate Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

574 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 142 Universal trunk car d - faceplate The f aceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 142 "Universal trunk card - f aceplate" (page 574) . When an NT8D14 Universal T runk Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to fiv e seconds while the self-test run[...]

Physical description 575 In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. When the card is installed, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the f aceplate flashes as the self-test r uns. If the self-test completes successfu[...]

576 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 143 Universal trunk car d - faceplate Functional description Figure 144 "NT8D14 Universal trunk card - bloc k diagram" (page 577) shows a bloc k diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Univ ersal T runk card. Each of these functions is described on the f ollowing pages . Nor tel Commu[...]

Functional description 577 Figure 144 NT8D14 Universal trunk car d - block diagram The Universal T runk Card: • allows trunk type to be configured on a per unit basis • indicates status dur ing an automatic or manual self-test • provides card-identification f or auto configuration, and to deter mine the serial number and fir mware lev el [...]

578 NT8D14 Universal T runk card • provides software selected balance impedance (600 ohm or comple x impedance network) on a per unit basis • interf aces eight PCM signals to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 f or mat • transmits and receives SSD signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format • suppor ts PCM signal loopback to DS[...]

Functional description 579 Figure 145 Universal trunk car d - bloc k diagram Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

580 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 146 NT8D14 Universal trunk car d - block diagram Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal T r unk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data ov er the card LAN link. These interf aces are descr ibed in "Intelligent P er ipheral Equipment" (page 21) . T runk interface un[...]

Functional description 581 Also provided are relays f or placing outgoing call signaling onto the tr unk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. T wo codecs are provided f or performing A/D and D/A conv ersion of tr unk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec suppor ts f our tr unk interface units. The f ollo[...]

582 NT8D14 Universal T runk card outgoing call signaling onto the tr unk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. T wo CODECs are provided f or performing A/D and D/A conv ersion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each Codec suppor ts f our trunk interface units. The f ollowing features are common to all un[...]

Functional description 583 — programming of input/output interf ace control circuits f or administration of trunk interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics — transmission pad settings The universal trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the inter nal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller ca[...]

584 NT8D14 Universal T runk card — maintenance diagnostics — transmission pad settings The Universal T runk Card is equipped with a microprocessor which controls card operation. The microprocessor also provides the communication function f or the card. The Universal T r unk Card communicates with the Controller Card through a serial communicati[...]

Operation 585 The signaling and control por tion of the Universal T runk Card works with the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receiv es messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and retur ns status inf or mation to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control por tion of the card provides the means for [...]

586 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Loop star t operation Loop star t operation is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages . When the card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (r inging) detection. Loop star t operation is configured in software and is implemented in t[...]

Operation 587 Figure 147 Loop star t call states - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS The aler ting signal into the Meridian 1 is 20 Hz (nominal) r inging sent by the CO . When an incoming call is ans wered, ringing is tripped when the Meridian 1 places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO . See Figure 153 "Loop st[...]

588 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 148 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS The aler ting signal is 20 Hz r inging sent by Nor th American CO . When an incoming call is answ ered, ringing is tr ipped when the trunk places a low resistance DC loop towards the CO . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card[...]

Operation 589 Figure 149 Loop start call states - incoming call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

590 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 150 Loop star t call connection sequence - incoming call Outgoing calls F or outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO . See Figure 151 "Ground star t call states - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS" (page [...]

Operation 591 to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interr upting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. Figure 151 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 M[...]

592 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 152 Ground star t call connection sequence - incoming call fr om CO/FX/W A TS F or outgoing calls from the Mer idian 1, software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and r ing leads toward the CO (see Figure 155 "Loop star t call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/[...]

Operation 593 is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the Mer idian 1 in the form of loop (interr upting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. F or outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO . See Figure 159 [...]

594 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 153 Loop star t call states - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS The CS 1000 software provides the polar ity-sensitive/polarity-insensitiv e (PSP and PIP) packs f eature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration f or loop star t and ground star t operation. On trunks equipped with f ar-end answer supe[...]

Operation 595 Figure 154 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

596 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 155 Loop star t call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 597 Figure 156 Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS Ground start operation Ground star t operation is configured in software and implemented through software do wnload messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative batter y is present on the ring lead. Nor [...]

598 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Ground star t operation is configured in software and implemented through software do wnload messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative batter y is present on the ring lead. Ground star t operation is configured in software and implemented through software do [...]

Operation 599 Figure 157 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

600 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 158 Ground star t call connection sequence - incoming call fr om CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 601 Figure 159 Ground start call states - incoming call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

602 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 160 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call Reverse-wiring compensation The CS 1000 software includes a feature f or detecting rev erse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the f ar-end r ing and tip leads) on ground star t trunks with far-end ans wer super vision. Nor tel Co[...]

Operation 603 Ordinarily , an incoming call on a re verse-wired trunk without re verse-wiring compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead. Since the software e xpects to see a ground on the tip lead, it inter prets the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the inter val between ringing sig[...]

604 NT8D14 Universal T runk card the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the inter val between ringing signals exceeds the s witchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, softw are assumes far-end disconnect. This causes the call to be presented to a console loop ke y and then immediately removed. The rev erse-wiring com[...]

Operation 605 T runks identified as possibly re verse wired are s witched by software to loop star t processing after the second r ing. This switching tak es place on a call-by-call basis. So if a pre viously correctly wired tr unk becomes re verse wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly re verse wired and the threshold count begins. I[...]

606 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 162 Ground star t call connection sequence - incoming call fr om CO/FX/W A TS If the threshold count e xceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as " positively re v erse wired." Once identified as positiv ely re verse wired, the call is presented continuously from t[...]

Operation 607 Note 1: The far-end can re verse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant ans wer . Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms bef ore reconnecting the ground detector . Outgoing calls F or outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the r ing lead. The CO responds b y gro[...]

608 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 163 Ground star t call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 609 Figure 164 Ground star t call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS The P olarity-Sensitive/P olar ity-Insensitive P ac ks (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground star t operation. Refer to the descr iption of loop star t operation f or a more complete discussi[...]

610 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 165 Ground star t call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 611 Figure 166 Ground star t call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/W A TS F or outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the r ing lead. The CO responds by g rounding the tip and retur ning dial tone. After the tip ground is detected b y the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and ring leads and the grou[...]

612 NT8D14 Universal T runk card DTMF tones. See Figure 167 "Ground star t call states - outgoing call" (page 612) and Figure 168 "Ground star t call connection sequence - outgoing call" (page 613) . The P olarity-Sensitive/P olar ity-Insensitive P ac ks (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-durat[...]

Operation 613 Figure 168 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

614 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 169 Loop start call states - outgoing call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 615 Figure 170 Loop start call connection sequence Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 171 "DID tr unk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO" (page 617) and Figure 172 "DID tr unk, loop DR call connection seque[...]

616 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO . When the called par ty ans wers, the universal trunk card rev erses batter y and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO . The tr unk is arranged f or first par ty release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop , at which time nor[...]

Operation 617 Figure 171 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call fr om CO Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate star t, dela y dial, or wink star t. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

618 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 172 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call fr om CO Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 619 Figure 173 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call fr om CO An incoming call from the CO places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Dial pulses or DTMF signals are then presented from the CO . When the call is presented and the ter minating par ty ans wers, the Univ ersal T runk Card rev erses batter y and grou[...]

620 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 174 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call fr om CO The trunk is arranged for first par ty release. The CO releases the tr unk by removing the low resistance loop and nor mal batter y and ground are restored at the system. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN4300[...]

Operation 621 T wo-wa y , loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation Incoming calls In an incoming call configuration, the f ar-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and r ing leads. See Figure 175 "T wo-wa y , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from f ar-end PBX" (page 622) and Figure 176 "T[...]

622 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 175 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 623 Figure 176 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

624 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 177 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 625 Figure 178 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX In an incoming call configuration, the f ar-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and r ing leads. See Figure 187 "T wo-wa y , loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from f ar-end PBX" ([...]

626 NT8D14 Universal T runk card When the called par ty ans wers, an ans wer super vision signal is sent by the software, causing the CS 1000 to rev erse batter y and ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. F ar-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring nor mal batter y and groun[...]

Operation 627 Figure 179 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Note: Where no f ar-end ans wer super vision is provided, the par ty at the near-end hangs up , after recognizing far-end call ter mination. In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card is connected to an e xisting PBX by a tie[...]

628 NT8D14 Universal T runk card (page 637) and Figure 190 "T wo-wa y , loop DR, tie tr unk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 638) also applies to outgoing calls on a DID tr unk. Note: Where no f ar-end ans wer super vision is provided, the par ty at the near-end hangs up after recognizing f ar-end call termin[...]

Operation 629 Figure 181 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

630 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 182 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 631 Figure 183 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

632 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 184 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 633 Figure 185 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

634 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 186 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 635 Figure 187 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call fr om far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

636 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 188 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 637 Figure 189 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

638 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 190 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Senderized operation for DID and two-wa y loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate Star t (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) star t, as assigned at t[...]

Operation 639 Note: If a ground star t trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after ground detection. If a loop star t tr unk, the outpulse tow ards office occurs one second later . F or immediate star t, follo wing the seizure signal, the f ar-end star ts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum). F or delay dial or wink star[...]

640 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 191 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/W A TS trunk Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 641 Figure 192 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/W A TS trunk Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards the office occurs after ground detection. If a loop star t trunk, the outpulse toward the office occurs one second later . F or immediate star t, f ollowin[...]

642 NT8D14 Universal T runk card F or delay dial or wink star t modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or batter y/ground re versal) is retur ned by the Meridian 1 after receipt of the seizure signal. The dela y dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure and ends (go signal) 384 ms later . The wink star t (stop) signal begins 384 ms aft[...]

Operation 643 The operation represented in Figure 196 "T wo-wa y , loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO" (page 647) also applies to incoming calls on a DID tr unk from a CO . Outgoing calls When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal from the f ar-end so that t[...]

644 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 193 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call thr ough far-end PBX to CO/FX/W A TS Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 645 Figure 194 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/W A TS trunk Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

646 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 195 T w o-way , loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call thr ough far-end PBX to CO/FX/W A TS Note: Pseudo-ans wer super vision is provided by near-end at e xpiration of end-of-dial timer . Where no far-end ans wer super vision is provided, the par ty at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end c[...]

Operation 647 Figure 196 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

648 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 197 T w o-way , loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation Incoming calls When the NT8D14 Univ ersal T r unk card is seiz ed by the f ar-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and r ing leads. Addressing[...]

Operation 649 See Figure 198 "T wo-wa y , loop OAID , TIE tr unk call states - incoming call from f ar-end PBX" (page 650) and Figure 199 "T wo-wa y , loop OAID , TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from f ar-end PBX" (page 651) . When the universal trunk card is seized b y the f ar-end on an incoming call, a low-[...]

650 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 198 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places batter y on the tip and ground on the r ing. This aler ts the far-end of the seizure. The f ar-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and r ing leads[...]

Operation 651 Figure 199 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call fr om far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

652 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 200 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing tr unk, the near-end places the batter y on the tip and ground on the ring. This aler ts the f ar-end of the seizure. The f ar-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and r ing le[...]

Operation 653 Figure 201 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

654 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 202 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the Universal T runk places batter y on the tip and ground on the ring. This aler ts the f ar end of the seizure. The f ar end responds with a low resistance across the tip and rin[...]

Operation 655 Figure 203 T w o-way , loop O AID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

656 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 204 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call fr om far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 657 Figure 205 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

658 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 206 T w o-way , loop O AID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 659 Figure 207 T w o-way , loop O AID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

660 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 208 T w o-way , loop O AID, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 661 Figure 209 T w o-way , loop O AID, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Ref er to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for inf ormation on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured f or Recorded An[...]

662 NT8D14 Universal T runk card • selectable termination of tip and r ing leads into 600 or 900 ohms for interf ace with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source • connection of up to 24 tr unk units to a single announcement machine channel Note: Ref er to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) fo r inf or mation on Multi-Channel RAN modes[...]

Operation 663 Recorded announcement mac hines Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are pla yed bac k to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially av ailable announcement machines store recordings digitally , although some drum and tape units are still in ser vice. An announcement machine can prov[...]

664 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 210 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk card (typical) Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are pla yed bac k to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially av ailable announcement machines store recordings digitally , although some drum a[...]

Operation 665 Figure 211 "Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card (typical)" (page 666) shows a typical connection from a single announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card installed in slot 0 in an NT8D37 IPE Module. See Communication Ser ver 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Con[...]

666 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 211 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card (typical) RAN modes of operation Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 668) shows the relationship of control signals to message pla yback f or the operating modes av ailable in announcement machines . The signal [...]

Operation 667 Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel. Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 669) shows the relationship of control signals to message pla yback f or the operating modes av ailable in announcement machines . The signal names shown in the figu[...]

668 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 212 RAN control signals (Contr ol GRD = IDLE) Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 669 Figure 213 RAN control signals (Contr ol GRD = IDLE) Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

670 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 214 RAN control signals (Contr ol GRD = IDLE) Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only , and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse star t or lev el star t modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only , and leav e the announce[...]

Operation 671 Multi-Channel RAN modes In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own dedicated RAN channel on a ph ysical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN routes do not suppor t the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk por ts together so that[...]

672 NT8D14 Universal T runk card F or the RAN machine types , the maximum length of the recorded announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal receiv ed from the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16. Multi-Channel Level Star t/Control Mode (minimum vintage BA) A RAN mode of operation is av ailable called "Multi-Channe[...]

Operation 673 The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Le vel Star t/Control mode, using the follo wing response: R TYP = MLSS. T runk members are provisioned in the T runk Data Block LD 14. Ref er to "Prog ramming RAN trunks" (page 675) and to Software Input/Output Ref erence — Administration (NN430[...]

674 NT8D14 Universal T runk card "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 670) . At the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call. Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates av ailability of an announcement machine message to the tr [...]

Operation 675 In the pulse star t mode, a star t pulse activates pla yback of a message that continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other star t pulses that might occur until the message is complete. In the le vel star t mode, the star t signal is a "le vel" r ather than a pulse. The leading edge of the star t si[...]

676 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Ref er to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) f or instr uctions on ser vice change programs .The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the T r unk Administration LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and T r unk Route Administration LD 16 programs. The T r unk Data [...]

Electrical specifications 677 T able 233 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600/900 ohms (Note 1) 600 ohms Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) 600 or 900 o[...]

678 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Line leakage ˇ S 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground ˇ S 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, rin[...]

Electrical specifications 679 Characteristic CO/FX/WATS trunks DID or TIE trunks RAN trunks Paging trunks Ground potential difference ±3 V ±1 V ±1 V Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing <300 ohms N/A N/A N/A High DC loop resistance ˇ S ˇ S ˇ S ˇ S Ground start ˇ S 30k ohms; loop start ˇ S 5M ohms N/A N/A N/A Ring detection 17 to 33[...]

680 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Characteristic CO/FX/WATS trunks DID or tie trunks RAN trunks Paging trunks DC signaling loop length (max) 1700-ohms loop with near-end battery of –42.75 V 2450-ohms loop with near-end battery of –44 V 600/ 900-ohms loop 600 ohms loop Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V (Note 4) –42 to –52.5 V –42 to –52 [...]

Electrical specifications 681 Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk Signaling type Loop start Ground or loop start Far end battery - 42 to - 52.5 V - 42 to - 52.5 V Near end battery N/A - 42.75 to - 52.5 V Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA Ground potential difference + 3 V + 3 V Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing N/A < 300 ohms High DC loop resi[...]

682 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) +8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA –48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA P ow er to the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card is provided b y the module power supply (ac or dc). T able 239 P ower requirements f or universal trunk card Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) +15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA +5.[...]

Electrical specifications 683 En vironmental specifications T able 241 "Environmental specifications f or the NT8D14 Universal T runk card" (page 683) lists the environmental specifications f or the NT8D14 Universal T runk card. T able 241 En vironmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal T runk card Parameter Specifications Ope[...]

684 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 244 En vironmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to 50 degrees C, ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 degrees C Release control Release control establishes which end of a call (near , far , either , joint, or originating) [...]

Electrical specifications 685 T able 245 Insertion Loss from IPE P orts to IPE Ports (measured in dB) The transmission proper ties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-ser vice (COS) you assign in the T r unk Data Block (LD 14). T ransmission proper ties ma y be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss (non-VNL). Non-VNL trunks are assign[...]

686 NT8D14 Universal T runk card In Option 11C systems, the inser tion loss from IPE por ts to IPE por ts is as f ollows. T able 246 Insertion Loss from IPE P orts to IPE Ports (measured in dB) Connector pin assignments The univ ersal tr unk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. T elephone trunks[...]

Connector pin assignments 687 Signal Signal Trunk Number Back- plane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Back- plane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes 2 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring 17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A 3 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring 19A CP A N/A 19B MB RG N/A 4 62A Tip Tip Tip 62B Ring Ring Ring 63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A 5 6[...]

688 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 248 Universal trunk card - bac kplane pinouts Signal Signal Trunk Number Back- plane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Back-pl ane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring 0 13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring 1 15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A 16A Tip Tip[...]

Connector pin assignments 689 Signal Signal Trunk Number Back- plane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Back- plane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes 63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A 5 64A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring 65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A 6 66A Tip Tip Tip 66B Ring Ring Ring 67A CP A N/A 67B MB RG N/A 7 68A Tip Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring 69A[...]

690 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 215 Universal trunk car d - typical cross connect example Configuration The trunk type f or each unit on the card as well as its ter minating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software ser vice change entries at the system ter minal and by jumper strap settings on the card. NT8D14 h[...]

Configuration 691 NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) , and T ab le 252 "T r unk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) show the functionality of these three jumpers. T able 250 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length[...]

692 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 251 Jumper strap settings - extended rang e (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level st[...]

Configuration 693 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is softw[...]

694 NT8D14 Universal T runk card The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in T able 251 "J umper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) , f or the following: • F or CO/FX/W A TS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.) • DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms • RA[...]

Configuration 695 Figure 216 Universal trunk card - jumper locations f or NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below F or most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory . See T able 255 "J umper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698) . F or CO/[...]

696 NT8D14 Universal T runk card (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698) . Figure 218 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 702) shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA). Service change entries The trunk type, ter minating impedance, a[...]

Configuration 697 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 hms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is softwa[...]

698 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 255 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) 0–1524m (5000ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Paging N[...]

Configuration 699 Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X"[...]

700 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) DID (loop length < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 DID (loop length ˇ S 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3CM2 RAN: continuous op[...]

Configuration 701 resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given in T able 258 "Cab le loop resistance and loss" (page 700) for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements . Figure 217 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BB Release 10 and higher Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circui[...]

702 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 218 Universal trunk card - jumper locations f or NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Configuration 703 T able 259 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Paging Not applicabl[...]

704 NT8D14 Universal T runk card T able 260 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and later) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: puls[...]

Configuration 705 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is softwar[...]

706 NT8D14 Universal T runk card The VNL class of ser vice is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of ser vice is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the T ransmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-T ransmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability[...]

Configuration 707 • TRC f or a 2-wire non-VNL tr unk f acility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or f or which impedance compensation is provided, or f or a 4-wire non-VNL f acility . • NTC f or a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided. See T able 263 "P ad switching al[...]

708 NT8D14 Universal T runk card The VNL class of ser vice is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of ser vice is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the T ransmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-T ransmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability[...]

Configuration 709 Port B pads Universal Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB) Port B Transmit Dt oA Receive At oD Transmi Dt oA Receive At oD Port B to Universal trunk card Universal trunk card to Port B PE CO/FX/WATS (TRC) Out Out In In 11 PE TIE Out Out In In 0.5 0.5 Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit [...]

710 NT8D14 Universal T runk card See T able 264 "P ad switching algorithm" (page 708) for the pad s witching control f or the various through connections and the actual por t-to-por t loss introduced for connections betw een the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card and any other por t designated as P or t B. T able 265 Pad s witching algorithm Po[...]

Applications 711 in a Media Gatew a y Expansion. See Communication Ser ver 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) f or tr unk wiring information. Figure 220 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk card (typical) A univ ersal tr unk card unit can be configured as a paging tr unk. Configur[...]

712 NT8D14 Universal T runk card In the P aging mode, the Universal T r unk is connected to a customer-pro vided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant ke y operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a typical application, it transf ers the input of the paging amplifier system to th[...]

Applications 713 Figure 221 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF .A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should[...]

714 NT8D14 Universal T runk card Figure 222 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal T runk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF . A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The au[...]

715 NT8D15 E and M T runk car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 715) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 719) "Functional description" (page 723) "Operation" (page 747) "Electrical specifications" (page 772) "Connector pin assignments" [...]

716 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card • 4-wire E and M T runks: — T ype I or T ype II signaling — duple x (DX) signaling • paging (P A G) trunks T ype I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. T ype II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires . Most electronic s witching systems use T ype II signaling. T able 266 "T r unk a[...]

Introduction 717 T ype I signaling utilizes two signaling wires plus ground. T ype II and DX signaling utilizes tw o pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use T ype II signaling. T able 267 "T r unk and signaling matrix" (page 717) lists the signaling and trunk types suppor ted by the E and M T runk card. T able 267 [...]

718 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card T able 268 T runk and signaling matrix Trunk types Signaling RLM/RLR Tie PAG CSA/CAA/CAM 2-wire E and M Yes Yes Yes Yes 4-wire E and M Yes Yes No Note: Yes for 11C and 11C mini. Yes Legend: RLM Release Link Main RLR Release Link Remote CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement [...]

Physical description 719 T able 269 Supported trunk and signaling matrix Signaling RLM RLR ATV TIE PAG CSA CAA CAM 2-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes 4-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes Physical description The line interf ace and common multiple xing circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) pr inted circuit board. The E [...]

720 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card The E and M T r unk card mounts in any IPE slot. The line interface and common multiple xing circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E and M T r unk card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cab led to the I/O panel [...]

Physical description 721 Figure 223 E and M T runk card - faceplate The E and M T r unk card mounts in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gatew ay and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gatew ay Expansion. The line interf ace and common multiple xing circuitr y is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) pr inted circuit board. Nor tel[...]

722 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card The E and M T r unk card connects to the bac kplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the Media Gatewa y using a 25-pin connector . T elephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wir ing plan similar to that[...]

Functional description 723 Figure 224 E and M T runk card - faceplate Functional description The NT8D15 E and M T r unk card ser ves v arious transmission requirements . The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by ser vice change entries. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 [...]

724 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 225 "E and M T r unk card - block diag ram" (page 725) shows a bloc k diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M T runk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the follo wing pages. The NT8D15 E and M T runk Card ser ves v ar ious transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on th[...]

Functional description 725 Figure 225 E and M T runk card - block dia gram • Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate Light Emitting Diode (LED). • Suppor ts loopback of PCM signals to DS30X f or diagnostic pur poses. • Card ID provided f or auto configuration and deter mining ser ial number and fir mware l[...]

726 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 226 E and M T runk card - block dia gram • Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two and f our-wire modes. • Allows trunk type to be configured on a per por t basis in software. • Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 C[...]

Functional description 727 Figure 227 E and M T runk card - block dia gram • Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit. • Software control of A/µ-Law mode . • Software control of digit collection. The f ollowing f eatures are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E and M T runk Card: • Analog-to-digital and dig[...]

728 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card • Ability to enable and disable individual por ts or the entire card under software control • Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in software and do wn loaded at power up and b y software commands. • Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate Light Emi[...]

Functional description 729 • provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire f acility connections • enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-por t basis in software • provide isolation of f oreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit • provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes • suppor t loopback of puls[...]

730 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card The E and M T runk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data ov er the card LAN link. The E and M T runk card contains f our identical and independently configurab le tr unk interf ace units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balance network [...]

Functional description 731 • F our-wire E and M signaling type I and II, two-w ay dial repeating (ESN and Non-ESN) — echo suppression f or type I — Switchable se ven dB and 16 dB f or carr ier interf ace f or ESN applications — T ransmit and receive of voice through two separate paths • T ype I signaling through E and M leads — T ype II[...]

732 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card • paging trunk operation (see Figure 231 "P aging tr unk operation" (page 735) ) with suppor t access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads Note: P aging end-to-end signaling is not suppor ted. Figure 228 E and M T ype I signaling Figure 229 E and M T ype II signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 10[...]

Functional description 733 The functions provided by each unit on the E and M T runk card include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as f ollows: • 2-wire, E and M T ype I signaling (see Figure 232 "E and M T ype I signaling" (page 736) ) with: — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection wi[...]

734 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 230 4-wire DX signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Functional description 735 Figure 231 Pa ging trunk operation — T ype I signaling through E and M leads — T ype II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end detection by E/SG leads • 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 234 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 738) ) • paging trunk operation (see Figure 235 "P aging tr unk[...]

736 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 232 E and M T ype I signaling — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice tr ansmission through tip and r ing for tr ansmit and receive • 4-wire, E and M T ype I and II signaling, 2-wa y dial repeating with: — echo suppression f or T ype I signaling — s witc[...]

Functional description 737 Figure 233 E and M T ype II signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

738 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 234 4-wire DX signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Functional description 739 Figure 235 Pa ging trunk operation Figure 236 E and M T ype I signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

740 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 237 4-wire DX signaling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Functional description 741 Figure 238 Pa ging trunk operation Card contr ol functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller , a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M T runk card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller , a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M T runk card. Contro[...]

742 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card E and M T runk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the ser ial communication link to the NT8D01 Controller Card. The microcontroller provides the f ollowing functions: • card-identification • self-test • control of card operation • status repor t to the contro[...]

Functional description 743 The card LAN provides a serial comm unication link for tr ansferring maintenance data and control signals between the tr unk card and the SSC card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller . The f ollowing functions are suppor ted: • providing card ID/RLS • repor ting self-test status • enabling/disab ling of the D[...]

744 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Signaling and control The signaling and control por tion of the E and M T runk card works with the system CPU to operate the card hardw are. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and retur ns status inf or mation to the CPU ov er the same channel. The signaling and contro[...]

Functional description 745 units to configure tr unk and signaling type. The remaining three messages are sent per card to select the make/break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law modes. The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the follo wing functions: • provide interface betw een the card and the system CPU — transmit PCM signals f[...]

746 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card • decode receiv ed messages to set configuration and activate/deactiv ate interf ace relays f or PCM loopback diagnostic pur poses • decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive outpulsing rela ys at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primar y), or 10 pps2 (secondar y) • monitor signals from the tr unk inter[...]

Operation 747 • card ID f or autoconfiguration and deter mination of ser ial number and firmware lev el The f ollowing f eatures are provided f or maintenance of the E and M T runk: • indication of card status from self-test • software enab le and disable capability f or individual units or entire card • loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X [...]

748 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 239 Signaling orientation f or tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E and M T ype I and II trunks. The call is ter minated and the trunk released by a disconnect message sent to the associated unit. Figure 242 "Signalin[...]

Operation 749 Figure 248 "E and M type signaling patter ns - or iginating par ty release" (page 766) shows E and M T ype I signaling patter ns for incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 249 "E and M T ype I signaling patter ns - or iginating par ty release on a tandem connection" (page 767) shows T ype I signaling patterns on a tan[...]

750 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 240 E and M T ype I signaling patterns - originating par ty release Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 751 Figure 241 E and M T ype I signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection — If ans wer super vision is provided b y the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Outgoing calls are processed as follo ws: • The M lead changes from ground to batter y . — If ans wer sup[...]

752 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 242 Signaling orientation f or tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks Outgoing calls are processed as follo ws: • The M lead changes from ground to batter y . — If ans wer super vision is provided b y the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Nor tel Comm[...]

Operation 753 Figure 243 E and M T ype I signaling patterns - originating par ty release Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

754 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 244 E and M T ype I signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection Incoming calls The f ar-end initiates calls as follows: • The g round is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. Nor tel Commun[...]

Operation 755 • If the f ar-end is equipped f or sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate star t, dela y dial, or wink star t), as assigned on a star t arrangement basis. See T able 270 "Operation Mode" (page 755) . — In immediate star t mode, there is no star t signal from the called office. The seizure signal (off hoo[...]

756 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card — In wink star t mode, within a 128–256 ms per iod after receipt of the seizure signal from the f ar-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms, wink star t, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office. T able 271 Operation mode Operation mode Start arrangement Immediate start IMM Delay dial DDL Wink start WNK[...]

Operation 757 E and M T ype II signaling Figure 245 "E and M T ype II signaling patter ns - or iginating par ty release" (page 758) shows E and M T ype II signaling patter ns f or incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 246 "E and M T ype II signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection" (page 759) shows T y[...]

758 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in the route data bloc k (LD 16). Disconnect super vision is specified f or each tr unk group independently . Only incoming tr unks in idle ground star t configuration can provide disconnect super vision. F or a list of prompts and responses and def ault con[...]

Operation 759 Figure 246 E and M T ype II signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection Duplex signaling Duple x (DX) signaling makes use of the voice tr ansmission leads f or signaling as well as f or voice transmission. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 Ma[...]

760 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card F or descr iptive pur poses, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair . The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the ov erall current flow betw een the near and far ends . During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same dire[...]

Operation 761 Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High T able 275 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating par ty release on tandem connections Condition Curre[...]

762 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Stored digits outpulsed on CO/FX/WATS trunk after ground detection if a ground start, but after 3 seconds if a loop start If answer supervision: pseudo-answer supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds after last dial pulse received No current flow Low If [...]

Operation 763 Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far-e[...]

764 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Outpulsed No current flow Low Far end answers No current flow Low Far end on hook first Current flow High Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk idled No current flow High Near end on [...]

Operation 765 Figure 247 Signaling orientation f or tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

766 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 248 E and M type signaling patterns - originating par ty release Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 767 Figure 249 E and M T ype I signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

768 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 250 E and M T ype II signaling patterns - originating par ty release Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Operation 769 Figure 251 E and M T ype II signaling patterns - originating par ty release on a tandem connection T able 277 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with or iginating par ty release" (page 762) and T able 278 "DX signaling - incoming calls with or iginating par ty release" (page 763) show call-connection and take-down sequ[...]

770 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card T able 281 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating par ty release Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No current flow High Seizure (dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits) Current flow High Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flo[...]

Operation 771 Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Stop sender No current flow Low Go sender (universal service provided by far-end PBX if originating end is senderized) Current flow High CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Outpulsed No current flow Low Far-[...]

772 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical specifications f or the E and M T r unk card. This section lists the electrical specifications f or the E and M T r unk card. The electrical characteristics of all tr unk circuits are provided in T able 286 "Electrical characteristics of trunk cards&[...]

Electrical specifications 773 Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing N/A 300 ohms High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or greater than 30 kS. Loop start equal to or greater than 5 MS Line leakage Equal to or greater than 30 kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, Ring to GND). Equal to or greater than 30 kS (T[...]

774 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc Near-end battery –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc Ground potential difference ±10 V dc ±10 V dc Line leakage between E lead and ground ˇ S20K ohms ³20K ohms Effective loss See pad table ( Table 30[...]

Electrical specifications 775 T able 291 P ower requirements Voltage Tolerance Max current +15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA –48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA P ow er requirements for the NT8D15 E and M T runk Card are specified in T able 292 "P ow er requirements" (page 775) . T able 292 P ower requirements [...]

776 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Parameter Specifications Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C (–40 to +158 degrees F) T able 295 En vironmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C (–40 to +158 degr[...]

Connector pin assignments 777 T elephone trunks connect to the E and M T r unk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used f or line cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 252 "E and M T runk card - typical cross connection example" (page 779) . A list of the connections to the E and M T runk card in the vario[...]

778 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card 4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB 17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB 18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB 1 19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB 63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB 64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB 2 65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA[...]

Connector pin assignments 779 Figure 252 E and M T runk card - typical cross connection example A typical connection e xample is shown in Figure 253 "E and M T runk card - typical cross connection example" (page 782) ; a list of the connections to the E and M T runk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in T able 299 "E and M T r[...]

780 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card T able 299 E and M T runk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 0 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring 1 19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring[...]

Connector pin assignments 781 The E and M T r unk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. Exter nal equipment connects to the card at the back of the Media Gate wa y and Media Gatewa y Expansion using a 25-pin connector . T elephone trunks connect to the E and M T r unk card at the MDF using a wiring [...]

782 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 253 E and M T runk card - typical cross connection example Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Connector pin assignments 783 Figure 254 E and M T runk card - typical cross connection example T able 301 E and M T runk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 0 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A R[...]

784 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring 3 69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M T able 302 E and M T runk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes 4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signa[...]

Configuration 785 Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M tr unk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and por t-to-por t loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entr ies. The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 255 "E and M T run[...]

786 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 255 E and M T runk card - jumper locations Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Configuration 787 T able 303 E and M T runk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Of[...]

788 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card T able 304 E and M T runk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (No[...]

Configuration 789 T able 305 E and M T runk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Of[...]

790 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card The trunk type is selected by making ser vice change entr ies in the Route Data Block Program LD 16. The companding mode is selected by making ser vice change entries in the T r unk Data Block Progr am (LD 14). Refer to T able 304 "E and M T runk card - jumper strap settings" (page 788) to select the proper[...]

Configuration 791 See T able 306 "P ad switching algorithm" (page 791) for the pad s witching control f or the various through connections and the actual por t-to-por t loss introduced for connections between the E and M T runk card and any other IPE por t designated as P or t B. Figure 256 "P ad or ientation" (page 791) shows [...]

792 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Note: F acilities associated with the Nor tel Networks Electronic Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire f or optimum transmission; so the 4-wire setting is generally ref erred to as the ESN setting. Ho we ver , the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks using the ESN f eature. Conv ersely , the 2-[...]

Configuration 793 Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB) Port B Transmit Dt oA Receive At oD Transmit Dt oA Receive At oD Port B to E and M E and M to Port B Universal trunk (TRC) Out Out In In 00 IPE TIE (VNL) In Out In Out 00 PE line N/A N/A Out In 3.0 4.0 PE CO/FX/W ATS (TRC) Out Out In In 00 PE TIE Out Out In In 00 Note: Transmi[...]

794 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card • P or t-to-por t connection loss is automatically set by softw are on the basis of the por t type selected in LD 16; only the por t type is set b y the user . The transmission proper ties of each trunk are characterized by the class of ser vice assigned in LD 14. T ransmission proper ties can be Via Net Loss (VNL)[...]

Applications 795 Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB) Port B Transmit Dt oA Receive At oD Transmit Dt oA Receive At oD Port B to E and M E and M to Port B PE CO/FX/W ATS (TRC) Out Out In In 00 PE tie Out Out In In 00 Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the CS 1000. Transmit is from the CS 1000 to the external fa[...]

796 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the s witchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as f ollows: • TRC f or a two-wire non-VNL trunk f acility with a loss of greater than 2 dB or f or which impedance compensation is provided, or for a f our-wire non-VNL f acility . • NTC[...]

Applications 797 The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the s witchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as f ollows: • TRC f or a two-wire non-VNL trunk f acility with a loss of greater than 2 dB or f or which impedance compensation is provided, or for a f our-wire non-VNL f acility . • NTC f or a two-wir[...]

798 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card control leads PG and A. See Figure 259 "P aging tr unk operation" (page 798) . In a typical application, this transf ers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk. Figure 259 Pa ging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a tr unk is connected to a customer-provi[...]

Applications 799 When used in the P aging mode the trunk circuit is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system. When the tr unk is accessed by dial up or attendant ke y operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a typical application, it transf ers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmiss[...]

800 NT8D15 E and M T r unk card Figure 261 Pa ging trunk operation Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

801 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface P ad dle Boar d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 801) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 802) "Functional description" (page 803) "Connector pin assignments" (page 805) "Configuring the SDI paddle board" (page 8[...]

802 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software , but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not suppor t 20 mA current loop interface . Physical description The NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interf ace paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 1[...]

Functional description 803 Figure 262 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous ser ial por ts. These serial por ts are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cab les. The serial por ts can be used to connect the system to a ter minal, a pr inter , a modem,[...]

804 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board paddle board b lock diagr am" (page 804) . Other logic on the card includes two baud rate gener ators, two RS-232-C driver/receiv er pairs, and the s witches and logic needed to configure the U ARTs . Figure 263 NT8D41AA SDI paddle boar d block diagram System considerations In dual-processor s[...]

Configuring the SDI paddle board 805 terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the s witch. Connector pin assignments The RS-232-C signals for por t 1 are brought out on connector J1 and the RS-232-C signals f or por t 2 are brought out on co[...]

806 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in "Software ser vice changes" (page 808) ". Option switch settings Address Address select s witch SW4 and logic on the card alwa ys address the two U AR T[...]

Configuring the SDI paddle board 807 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial por t can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions f or setting the s witches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown in T able 314 "NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber s witch settings" (page 807) . T [...]

808 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Figure 264 SDI paddle board option switc h locations Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions f or running the Con?[...]

Applications 809 Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record progr am LD 17, are shown in "LD 17 - Ser ial por t configuration parameters ." (page 809) . These parameters m ust be set f or each por t if both por ts are being used. LD 17 - Serial por t configuration parameters. Prompt Response Descri[...]

810 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board between the Meridian 1 system and two e xter nal devices . The SDI paddle board is usually used to connect the Mer idian 1 system to the system administration and maintenance ter minal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem,[...]

Physical description 811 The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software , but can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not suppor t 20 mA current loop interface . Physical description The NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interf ace paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 [...]

812 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Figure 266 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous ser ial por ts. These serial por ts are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cab les. The serial por ts can be used to connect the Meridian 1 system to [...]

Functional description 813 paddle board b lock diagr am" (page 813) . Other logic on the card includes two baud rate gener ators, two RS-232-C driver/receiv er pairs, and the s witches and logic needed to configure the U ARTs . Figure 267 NT8D41AA SDI paddle boar d block diagram System considerations In dual-processor Meridian 1 systems, the [...]

814 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board the maintenance ter minal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without aff ecting the operation of the s witch. Connector pin assignments The RS-232-C signals for por t 1 are brought out on connector J1 and the RS-232-C signals f or[...]

Configuring the SDI paddle board 815 Configuring the SDI paddle board Configuring the SDI paddle board to work in a Meridian 1 system consists of setting these option switches f or each serial por t: • P or t address • Baud rate • DTE/DCE/Fiber mode The SDI paddle board has sev en option switches , SW 2–8. Figure 268 "SDI paddle boa[...]

816 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board T able 317 SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings Port 1 – SW2 Port 2 – SW3 Baud rate 12341234 150 off off on on off off on on 300 off on off on off on off on 600 off off off on off off off on 1200 off on on off off on on off 2400 off off on off off off on off 4800 off on off off off on off [...]

Configuring the SDI paddle board 817 Figure 268 SDI paddle board option switc h locations Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17, are shown in T able 319 "Serial por t configuration parameters" (page 818) . These parameters must be set for each por t if both por ts are being used.[...]

818 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board T able 319 Serial por t configuration parameters Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change configuration. TYPE CFN Configuration type. IOTB YES Change input/output devices. ADAN NEW TTY x New PRT x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15. CDNO 1–16 Use the SDI [...]

Applications 819 Figure 269 SDI paddle board cab ling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

820 NT8D41AA Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

821 NT8D41B A Quad Serial Data Interface P addle Boar d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 821) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 822) "Functional description" (page 822) "Connector pin assignments" (page 824) "Configuring the QSDI paddle board" ([...]

822 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, b ut can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not suppor t the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interf ace. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface paddle board is a printed[...]

Functional description 823 Figure 270 NT8D41BA QSDI pad dle board Other logic on the card includes baud rate gener ators, RS-232-C driver/receiv er pairs, and the s witches and logic needed to configure each UA R T . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008[...]

824 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Figure 271 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle boar d block diagram System considerations F or CS 1000 4.5 and 5.0, in dual-processor systems, the 2 card slots on the back of a CoreNet shelf suppor ting CP PII and CP PIV function regardless of which CPU is activ e. On Release 5.0 only the CP PII and CP PIV ar[...]

Configuring the QSDI paddle board 825 T able 320 Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 DCD Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used) 2 RD Transmitted data Received data 3 TD Received data Transmitted data 4 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2) 5 GND Si[...]

826 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board T able 321 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.20 on on on off 2,400 38.40 on off on off 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.6[...]

Configuring the QSDI paddle board 827 T able 323 NT8D41BA ad dress switch settings SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2 + 34 5 6 7 8 01 E X off off off off off off Device 23 E X off off off off off on 4 5 E X off off off off on off pair 6 7 E X off off off off on on 89 E X off off off on off off addresses 10 11 E X off off of[...]

828 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 — SW 2 Mode 1 2 3 4561234 56 NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on o[...]

Applications 829 The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the s witch, or through a modem f or remote maintenance. Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smar t modem (such a[...]

830 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Figure 272 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle boar d cabling The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, b ut can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not suppor t the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interf ace. Physical description The NT8D[...]

Physical description 831 The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane f or a total of f our ser ial por ts. Up to 12 other serial por ts can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial por ts on the card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and 15), using s wit[...]

832 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Figure 273 NT8D41BA QSDI pad dle board Functional description The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has f our asynchronous ser ial por ts. These serial por ts are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cab les. The serial por ts can be used to connect the Meridian 1 [...]

Functional description 833 The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous Receiver/T ransmitters (U ARTs) and the logic necessar y to connect the U AR Ts to the system processor bus . See Figure 274 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board b lock diagr am" (page 833) . Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C [...]

834 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board The QSDI paddle board is nor mally installed into a sock et in the network area of the bac kplane. This allows it to be accessed b y either of the system processors. This is necessar y because the active CPU s witches automatically each night at midnight and whenev er a f ault occurs on the act[...]

Configuring the QSDI paddle board 835 Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 5 G N D Signal Ground Signal Ground 6 D S R Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 R T S Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2) 8 C T S Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts[...]

836 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board T able 327 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.20 on on on off 2,400 38.40 on off on off 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.6[...]

Configuring the QSDI paddle board 837 SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2 + 34 5 6 7 8 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on * To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because[...]

838 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 —SW 2 Mode 123456123456 DTE (terminal) o n o n o n o ff o n o ff o ff o n o ff o n o ff o n DCE (modem) o ff o ff o ff o n o ff o n o n o ff o n o ff o n o ff NT1P61 (Fiber) o n o n o n o n o n o ff o n o n o n o ff o n o ff Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA Q[...]

Applications 839 Figure 275 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle boar d cabling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

840 NT8D41BA Quad Ser ial Data Interface P addle Board Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

841 NT A G26 XMFR car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 841) "MF signaling" (page 841) "Ph ysical specifications" (page 844) Introduction The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF digit inf or mation. Connections are made between a[...]

842 NT AG26 XMFR card Digit Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 8 900 Hz +1500 Hz 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz XMFR receiver spec[...]

Introduction 843 Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digits Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms S[...]

844 NT AG26 XMFR card Physical specifications The ph ysical specifications required by the NT AG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in T able 332 "Ph ysical specifications" (page 844) . Introduction T able 332 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Faceplate LED Lit [...]

MF signaling 845 Digit Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz XMFR receiver specifications T able 334 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 845) provides the operating r[...]

846 NT AG26 XMFR card Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -12 dBs all digits ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB 56201 Error Rate from Power Lines Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dB[...]

Physical specifications 847 T able 335 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000[...]

848 NT AG26 XMFR card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

849 NT AK02 SDI/DCH car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 849) "NT AK02 SDI/DCH card" (page 849) Introduction The NT AK02 Ser ial Data Interf ace/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is suppor ted in the Media Gatewa y only f or the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. [...]

850 NT AK02 SDI/DCH card T able 337 Switch settings Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in t[...]

NT AK02 SDI/DCH card 851 T able 339 NT AK02 pinouts - P ort 0 at the cross-connect terminal RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE 1T 1R W-BL BL-W 0 DTR 0 DCD — O — I 2T 2R W-O O-W DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O 3T 3R W-G G-W RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O 4T 4R W-BR BR-W RX TX TX RX I O O I 5T 5R W-S S-W — SG — SG [...]

852 NT AK02 SDI/DCH card RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 12T 12R BK-O O-BK RXDB TXDB TXDB RXDB I O O I — — — — — — — — 25T 25R V-S S-V SG — SG — — — — — — — — — SG — SG — T able 341 NT AK02 connections at th[...]

NT AK02 SDI/DCH card 853 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 20T 20R Y-S S-Y RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O O I I O RTS CTS CTS RTS 21T 21R V-BL BL-V SCRA SCTA SCTEA RXCA I I O O I I O O SCR SCT SCT — 22T 22R V-O O-V SCRB SCTB SCTEB RXCB I I O O — — ?[...]

854 NT AK02 SDI/DCH card • Data bit: T ransparent (1) • Duplex: Full • Clock: Internal or e xter nal • Interface: RS-232-D , RS-422-A Introduction The NT AK02 Ser ial Data Interf ace/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is suppor ted in the Media Gatewa y only f or the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. Up to four NT AK02 SDI/DCH cards [...]

NT AK02 SDI/DCH card 855 Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U .K. T wo por ts off er the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. T able 345 &quo[...]

856 NT AK02 SDI/DCH card RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE 2T 2R W-O O-W DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O 3T 3R W-G G-W RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O 4T 4R W-BR BR-W RX TX TX RX I O O I 5T 5R W-S S-W — SG — SG — — — — T able 347 NT AK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1 RS422 RS232 Cabl e Si[...]

NT AK02 SDI/DCH card 857 T able 348 NT AK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2 RS422 RS232 Cabl e Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 13T 13R BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR — DCD 14T 14R BK-BR BR-BK — — — — I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI[...]

858 NT AK02 SDI/DCH card RS422 RS232 Cabl e Signal Designatio ns I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 24T 24R V-BR BR-V RXDB TXDB TXDB RXDB I O O I — — — — — — — — 25T 25R V-S S-V — SG — SG — — — — — — — — SG — SG — Characteristics of the low speed p[...]

859 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 859) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 860) "Functional description" (page 867) "Architecture" (page 869) Introduction The NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital tr unk card is a standard-size IPE c[...]

860 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The NT AK09 is a standard-size intelligent per ipheral equipment circuit card in the Option 11C main and IP expansion cabinets. It provides 1.5Mb ISDN primar y rate interf ace and digital trunk interf ace capability . The NT AK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards: the NT AK20 clock controller and the NT AK93/NT[...]

Physical description 861 Figure 276 NT AK09 DTI/PRI circuit car d The NT AK09 DTI/PRI card has sev en faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NT AK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the cloc k controller and DCHI daughterboards. The first five LEDs operate as f ollows: • During system power up, the LEDs ar[...]

862 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card LED State Definition Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information. RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. LBK On (Green) NTAK09 is [...]

Physical description 863 The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multila yer printed circuit board with buried power and ground la yers. The clock controller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened b y standoffs and connectors. See Figure 277 "NT AK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 863) . The NT AK09 DTI/PRI card has sev en facepla[...]

864 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card LED State Definition On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, and it is not in a loopback state. ACT Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other LEDs for more information. On (Red) A red-alarm state has bee[...]

Physical description 865 T able 354 NT AK09 LED states during self-test Action LED State Power up system Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds. Self-test in progress Top five LEDs go out for one second. If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash on and off three times. If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top five LEDs flash on an[...]

866 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Self-tests of the NT AK93 daughterboard are invok ed manually by commands in LD 96. The NT AK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the f aceplate of the NT AK09 DTI/PRI card. The NT AK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When pow er is applied, it tur ns red and rem[...]

Functional description 867 Foreign and surge volta g e protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an e xternal T1 carr ier facility and the system. F or public T1 f acilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company . In a pr ivate T1 facility en vironment (a campus, f or e xample), the NT AK92 protection assembly [...]

868 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card • configurab le D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps , 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inv er ted. • self-test NT AK09 provides the f ollowing f eatures and functions: • configurab le parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe f or mats • AMI or B8ZS [...]

Architecture 869 • integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mix ed on the same PRI) • f aceplate monitor jacks f or T-1 interface • configurab le D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps , 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inv er ted. • self-test Arc hitecture Signaling interface The signaling interf ace perf or ms an 8 Kbps signa[...]

870 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card • T ransmit voice: inser ts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits f or DS1, and provides gr aceful entr y into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call. • Receive v oice: inser ts digital pads and provides graceful entr y into T-Link data mode when the data m[...]

Architecture 871 • Receive v oice: inser ts digital pads and provides graceful entr y into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI tr unk is originating the call. • T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conv ersion to/from the DM-DM protocol. • Receive ABCD filte[...]

872 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transf er function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator . The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-La w coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law , A-Law to µ255, and A-Law to A-Law . These values are[...]

Architecture 873 Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 3 4dB -10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.1dB 7db 6 8dB 9db 7 -1dB 10db 8 -3dB 11db 9 -4dB 12db A idle code, 7F 3db B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D -2dB spare E -5db spare F -6db spare D-channel interface The D-channel interf ace is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE de vice[...]

874 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duple x, ser ial bit-stream configured as a DCE de vice. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receiv e clock output, and transmit cloc k output. The receive and tr ansmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each other as deter min[...]

Architecture 875 DS-1 Carrier interface T ransmitter The transmitter takes the binar y data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiv er and produces bipolar pulses f or transmission to the e xter nal digital facility . The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to e xtend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are s witch selecta[...]

876 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card e xtend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are s witch selectable through dip-switches . The settings are shown in T able 360 "NT AK09 s witch settings" (page 876) . T able 360 NT AK09 switch settings Switch Setting Distance to Digital Cross-Connect 1 DCH F/W 2 (LEN 0) 3 (LEN 1) 4 (LEN 2) 0 - 13[...]

Architecture 877 From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male D-type connector . T able 362 DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable From 50-[...]

878 NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card A TTENTION IMPORT ANT! Each Media Gatewa y that has a digital tr unk must ha ve a clock controller cloc ked to an external reference cloc k. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clock ed from diff erent Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade v oice quality . [...]

879 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 879) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 880) "Functional description" (page 883) "Architecture" (page 885) Introduction The NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-co[...]

880 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card A TTENTION IMPORT ANT! Each Media Gatewa y that has a digital tr unk must ha ve a clock controller cloc ked to an external reference cloc k. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clock ed from diff erent COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degr ade voice quality . The NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI [...]

Physical description 881 LED State Definition Off No far end alarm. LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode. Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode. CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled. On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode. Flashing (Green) The clock cont[...]

882 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card LED State Definition On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference Off The clock controller is switched off Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in[...]

Functional description 883 LED State Definition Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off. Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. P ower requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its po[...]

884 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities f or near-end and f ar-end • self-test • download of incoming ABCD validation times from software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted) The NT AK10 provides the follo wing features and functions: • a cloc k controller that can be s witched in as an option •[...]

Architecture 885 • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities f or near-end and f ar-end • self-test • download of incoming ABCD validation times from software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted) Applicability to France F eatures specific to DTI requirements f or F rance are implemented in firmware, and are switch-accessed. Thes[...]

886 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card • Card-LAN interf ace • carrier interface • clock controller interf ace The main functional bloc ks of the NT AK10 architecture include: • DS-30X interf ace • signaling interf ace • three microprocessors • digital pad. • Card-LAN interf ace. • carrier interface . • clock controller interf ace. A descr[...]

Architecture 887 T ransmit data T o transmit data on the carr ier , the incoming ser ial bit stream from the NT AK02 circuit card is conv er ted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extr acted by the signaling interf ace circuitr y . Digital P ad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PR OM. The PROM contains pad values, idle code, a[...]

888 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Receive data T o receive data, PCM/Data from the carr ier interface is con ver ted from serial to parallel, is buff ered, and is f ed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the DS-30X interf ace, where signaling inf or mation from the signaling interface circuitr y is multiple xed. T o receive data, PCM/Data from the carr ie[...]

Architecture 889 • controlling LEDs • downloading LCAs • monitoring errors and alar ms • detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data • counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alar ms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors • monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment • detecting and repor tin[...]

890 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The external interconnection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with a NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. The e xter nal connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. CEPT interface F or the Conference of European P ostal Communications (CEPT) interface , the connection to the external d[...]

Architecture 891 If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05. Channel associated signaling Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carr ying channel has its own signaling channel per manently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisor y and address. Channel [...]

892 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card With the e xception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as Denmark’s Flash signal and Sweden’s P arking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum duration time that is longer than 100 ms. The desired abcd bit pattern for a channel is output b y t[...]

Architecture 893 • transmitting AIS f or CNET (Fr ance) application The functions of this microprocessor include: • receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor , decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions • transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor • handling PPM • updating the TS16 select RAM a[...]

894 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Carrier interface Tx Direction The HDB3 encoded multiple x er output is sent to the output selector , which selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around f ar end data. The HDB3 is conv er ted from digital to AMI and sent to the carr ier . A transf ormer provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).[...]

Architecture 895 A TTENTION IMPORT ANT! Each Media Gatewa y that has a digital tr unk must ha ve a clock controller cloc ked to an external reference cloc k. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clock ed from diff erent Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade v oice quality . The recov ered [...]

896 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: trac king or non-trac king (also known as free-run). The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: trac king or non-trac king (also known as free-run). See "Clocking modes" (page 906) . T racking mode There are two stages to clock controller trac kin[...]

Architecture 897 When tracking a ref erence, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are ver y near to being matched, the clock controller is lock ed onto the reference . The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and sy[...]

898 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The NT AK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and f eatures include: • phase-locking to a ref erence, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the bac kplane. Up to two ref erences at a time may be accepted. • providing primar y to secondar y switcho ver and auto-recovery • pre[...]

Architecture 899 Switchov er may occur in the case of ref erence degradation or ref erence f ailure. When perf or mance of the ref erence degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allow ed to follo w the timing signal, then the ref erence is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the[...]

900 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card to the secondar y , but s witches over to the pr imar y whenev er the pr imar y recov ers. If the pr imar y recov ers first, then the clock controller tr acks to the primar y . If the software command "track to secondar y" is given, the cloc k controller trac ks to the secondar y ref erence and continuously mo[...]

Architecture 901 the clock controller . The secondar y reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used. The clock controller provides an external timing interf ace and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references . In this case, an e[...]

902 NT AK10 2.0 Mb DTI card V ar ious 2MB DTI s witchable options exist on the NT AK10. These are: Switch Off (Switch Open) On (Switch Closed) S1-1 -- S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled S2-1 120 ohm 75 ohm S2-2 75 ohm 120 ohm S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware S3-2 -- Note: The ON position f or all the switches is to wards the bottom of the card. Th[...]

903 NT AK20 Cloc k Contr oller daughterboar d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 903) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 909) "Functional description" (page 910) Introduction Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in[...]

904 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard A TTENTION IMPORT ANT! Each Media Gatewa y that has a digital tr unk must ha ve a clock controller cloc ked to an external reference cloc k. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one tr unk card is placed in the Main cabinet. Note: Clock[...]

Introduction 905 It is consequently located in slots 1 to 9 of the main and IP expansion cabinets and can suppor t 1.5 Mb , 2.0 Mb , and 2.56 Mb clock recov er y rates Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and NT AK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. A TTENTION[...]

906 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The NT AK20 clock controller card can suppor t 1.5 Mb , 2.0 Mb , and 2.56 Mb clock recov er y rates. A TTENTION IMPORT ANT! Each Media Gatewa y that has a digital tr unk must ha ve a clock controller cloc ked to an external reference cloc k. Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gate wa ys that are [...]

Introduction 907 T racking mode In tracking mode , one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the NT AK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tr acking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Pr imar y Reference Source (PREF) f or clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondar y Ref erence Sourc[...]

908 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the incoming reference is unstable , the inter nal clock controller remains continuously in the trac king stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather , it shows that the cloc k controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips a[...]

Physical description 909 In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on an y source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. F ree-r un mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to be a slav e. It can occur [...]

910 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard State Definition On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD60. If t[...]

Functional description 911 • e xter nal timing interface The main functional bloc ks of the NT AK20 architecture include: • phase diff erence detector circuit • digital phase-lock loop • clock detection circuit • digital-to-analog conv er ter • CPU MUX bus interf ace • signal conditioning dr ivers and b uffers • sanity timer • mic[...]

912 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements, and e valuating input jitter and PLL perf or mance. This circuit, under fir mware control, enables a phase diff erence measurement to be tak en between the ref erence entering the PLL and the system clock. The phase difference is used f or ma[...]

Functional description 913 T able 373 System cloc k specification and characteristics Specifications CCITT EIA Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz Accuracy ±3 ppm ±1 ppm Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min. Tuning Range (minimum) ±90 ppm max.[...]

914 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Specifications CCITT EIA ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min. Tuning Range (minimum) ±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max. Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center EIA/CCITT compliance The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Str atum 3ND , 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The diff erence[...]

Functional description 915 and the other ref erence is still within specification, an automatic s witchover is initiated without software inter v ention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdov er . Switchov er occurs in the case of ref erence degradation or loss of signal. When perf or mance of the refer[...]

916 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard An automatic switcho ver is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondar y recovers first, then the clock controller trac ks to the secondar y; howe v er , it switches o ver to the primar y when the pr imar y recovers . If the primar y recovers first, the cloc k controller tracks to t[...]

Functional description 917 T o prev ent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primar y and secondar y reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented. Digital to analog con ver ter The Digital to Analog Con ver ter (D A C) enables the microprocessor to tr ack, hold, and modify the error signal generated i[...]

918 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-run mode of operation automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled. In the temporar y absence of a synchronization ref ere[...]

Functional description 919 • minimizes the propagation of impair ments on the system clock due to errors on the primar y or secondar y reference cloc ks The microprocessor does the follo wing: • communicates with software • monitors 2 ref erences • provides a self-test dur ing initialization • minimizes the propagation of impair ments on [...]

920 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard External timing interface The clock controller provides an e xter nal timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references . An e xter nal ref erence is an auxiliar y timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carr ying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing si[...]

Functional description 921 Item Specification Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 hardware integrity and regulator y specifications: EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J CSA C108.8 CISPR publication 22 ESD IEC 801-2 Temperature IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IE[...]

922 NT AK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Item Specification Temperature IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networ[...]

923 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 923) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 924) "Functional description" (page 932) "Architecture" (page 933) Introduction The NT AK79 2.0 Mb Pr imar y Rate Interf ace (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb i[...]

924 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The NT AK79, which can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets , provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) f or the Option 11C system. This circuit card also includes onboard circuitr y equivalent to the NT AK20 Clock Controller that can be manually s witched in or out of ser vice. T[...]

Physical description 925 LED State Definition On (Green) The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. ACT Off The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS)[...]

926 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card T able 377 NT AK79 LEDs LED State Definition On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is either disabled or out-of-service. OOS Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red.[...]

Physical description 927 of the Primar y Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated with the on-board Cloc k Controller and the on-board D-channel interf ace (DCHI). The LEDs are described in T able 377 "NT AK79 LEDs" (page 926) . T able 378 NT AK79 LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is[...]

928 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card NT AK79 switches The NT AK79 card incor porates f our on-board dip s witches. The tab les that f ollow provide inf or mation on the various settings and related functions of these s witches. Note: The ON position f or all the switches is to wards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the boa[...]

Physical description 929 Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration This s witch sets the carr ier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms. T wisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms . Coaxial cable is usually associated with the 75 ohms setting. T able 380 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down[...]

930 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Figure 279 NT AK79 card with switch locations Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration This s witch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not suppor ted at this time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. T able 383 Switch SW1 Switch Down (On) Up (Off)[...]

Physical description 931 T able 384 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off) Switch SW3 - Clock Contr oller Configuration This s witch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Cloc k Controller . Disable the SW 3-2 if the on-board cloc k controller is not in use. T able 385 Switch SW3 Switch Down (On) U[...]

932 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card En vironment The NT AK79 meets all applicable Nor tel Network’s operating specifications. The NT AK79 meets all applicable Nor tel Network’s operating specifications. The NT AK79 meets all applicable Nor tel Network’s operating specifications. Functional description The NT AK79 card provides the f ollowing featu[...]

Architecture 933 • onboard D-channel interf ace • 32 software-selectab le Tx & Rx P ad values • conv ersion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) • Card-LAN f or maintenance communications The NT AK79 card provides the f ollowing features and functions: • recov er y of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver , at signal lev els[...]

934 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The main functional bloc ks of the NT AK79 architecture include: • DS-30X interf ace • A07 signaling interface • digital pad • carrier interface • CEPT transceiv er • SLIP control • D-Channel suppor t interface • 8031 microcontroller • Card-LAN / echo / test por t interface A description of each bloc k [...]

Architecture 935 The NT AK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interlea ved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message f or mat; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is con ver ted to 8-bit parallel[...]

936 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB 6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB 7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB 8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB 9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB 10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and o[...]

Architecture 937 PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-La w or Mu-Law and one of 32 possib le P AD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed[...]

938 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Signaling interface The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller . This interface pro vides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero . Messages are 3 bytes in length. The[...]

Architecture 939 T able 390 Impedance matching switch selection Cable On Off 75 ohms S2 S1 120 ohms S1 S2 Note: The ON position f or all the switches is to wards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left cor ner of each individual switch. The line interface provides f or the use of either [...]

940 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card T able 393 Carrier shield grounding switch settings Switch Carrier Pair On Off S4-1 Rx shield Open GND S4-2 Tx shield Open GND NT AK79 provides f or the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carr ier . Closing (down) the on-board s witch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier ca[...]

Architecture 941 attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB ov er the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. The receiver e xtracts data and clock from an AMI (Alter nate Mark Inv ersion) coded signal and outputs cloc k and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to[...]

942 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions are used f or synchronization, channel, and signal e xtraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver pro vides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock an[...]

Architecture 943 The NT AK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single por t of an NT AK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables f or a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-channel on a single circuit card. The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NT AK79 faceplate to indicate e[...]

944 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The D-channel suppor t interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duple x ser ial bit stream configured as a DCE device . The data signals include: • Receive data output • transmit data input • receive cloc k output • transmit cloc k output The receive and transmit cloc ks var y in bit r ate between each other , as determined[...]

Architecture 945 The connection betw een the PRI2 and the on-board D-Channel Handler Interf ace card is also av ailable at the MDF connector . The signals confir m to the EIA RS-422 standard. Connections would not be made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They are a vailable f or future or special applications. The connection betwe[...]

946 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Clock contr oller interface The clock controller circuitry on the NT AK79 is identical to that of the NT AK20 clock controller . Though se ver al DTI/PRI pac ks can exist in one system, only one cloc k controller may be activ ated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be s witched off. clock controller circuitr y on [...]

Architecture 947 When tracking a ref erence, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are ver y near to being matched, the clock controller is lock ed onto the reference . The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and sy[...]

948 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card If the incoming reference is unstable , the inter nal clock controller remains continuously in the trac king stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather , it shows that the cloc k controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, h[...]

Architecture 949 • provide jitter filtering • make use of an algorithm to aid in detecting cr ystal aging and to qualify clocking inf ormation The NT AK79 clock controller functions and features include: • phase lock to a reference , generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and distribute it to the CPU through the backplane . Up to two reference[...]

950 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card that it is within specifications. On f ailure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDO VER mode and continuously monitors both references . An automatic s witchover is initiated to the reference that recov ers first. If the secondar y recov ers first, then the clock controller trac ks to the[...]

Architecture 951 A time-out mechanism prev ents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primar y and secondar y reference sources . See "A utorecovery and chatter" (page 915) . Holdover and free-run In the temporar y absence of a synchronization ref erence signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to e[...]

952 NT AK79 2.0 Mb PRI card timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two e xter nal/auxiliar y ref erences or the NT AK79 references . NT AK79 has the necessar y hardware f or routing its ref erence to the appropriate line on the backplane Software is responsib le f or the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no cont[...]

953 NT AK93 D-c hannel Handler Interface daughterboar d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 953) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 955) "Functional description" (page 956) Introduction The NT AK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN PRI trunk[...]

954 NT AK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard The DCHI perf or ms D-channel Lay er 2 message processing and transfers La yer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches . It is mounted on the NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (installed in the Media Gatewa y) using standoff ref erence pins and conne[...]

Physical description 955 The NT AK93 daughterboard provides the f ollowing features and functions: • D-channel interf ace or DPNSS interface • Special f eatures included for LAPD implementation at DCH: — system parameters are ser vice changeab le (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming La yer 3 message validation procedu[...]

956 NT AK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard LEDs are located on the f aceplate of the NT AK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCH LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as f ollows: T able 400 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled. On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily [...]

Functional description 957 The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI mode. One microprocessor handles data transf er between each pair of serial por ts and software, repor ts the status of each por t and takes commands from software to control the activities of the por ts. The microprocessors also do some of D-channel d[...]

958 NT AK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard A total of 32K bytes of R OM space for each pair of por ts is reser v ed as a code section of the DCH-POR T fir mware. LAPD data link/asynchr onous controller One chip controls each pair of independent communication por ts. It perf or ms the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-seria[...]

Functional description 959 DPNSS/DCHI P or t The mode of operation of the DCH-POR T is controlled by a s witch setting on the NT AK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the s witch is ON; f or DCHI it is OFF . The por t operates at: Data Rate 56kbps, 64kbps Duplex Full Clock Internal / External Interface RS422 The address of por ts is selected by hardwired backplan[...]

960 NT AK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard D-P or t - SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief descr iption of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI, DCHI-POR T is considered Data T er minal Equipment (DTE): • SD A, SDB: T ransmit Clock provided b y SDTI/PRI • R T A, R TB: Receive Cloc k provided by SDTI/PRI • RR, CS: SPDC ready signal pr[...]

961 NTBK22 MISP car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 961) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 961) "Functional description" (page 962) Introduction The NTBK22 Multi-Pur pose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that[...]

962 NTBK22 MISP card Note: When configuring BRI tr unks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be co-located in the same Media Gate wa y as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC (NT6D71) cards the MISP is suppor ting. Ref er to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318) and ISDN Basic Rate Interf ace: Features (NN43001-580) f or additiona[...]

Functional description 963 Each MISP can suppor t 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card suppor ts 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP suppor ts 32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP suppor ts 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carr ying pack et data, it must dedicate one of i[...]

964 NTBK22 MISP card • control terminal initialization and addressing • assign B-channels for s witched voice and data transmission b y communicating with the BRI terminal ov er the D-channel and allocating to it an idle B-channel with appropr iate bearer capabilities • separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data to [...]

Functional description 965 This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memor y (SRAM) as a communication e xchange center between the CPU and the MPU . Both the CPU and the MPU can access this memor y over the transmit and receive channels on the bus . Inf or mation e xchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with pack etized messages t[...]

966 NTBK22 MISP card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

967 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 967) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 968) "Functional description" (page 973) "Architecture" (page 975) Introduction The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interf ace. It suppor ts th[...]

968 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NT AK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides suppor t for protocols based on the MSDL platform. The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2 Mb PRI interf ace for the CS 1000. The NTBK50 card sups the NT AK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NT A[...]

Physical description 969 Figure 280 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards The LEDs are descr ibed in T able 402 "NTBK50 faceplate LEDs" (page 969) . T able 402 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completio[...]

970 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the f[...]

Physical description 971 LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS) or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far [...]

972 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the f[...]

Functional description 973 Figure 281 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards Functional description NTBK50 provides the follo wing features and components: • recov er y of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver , at signal lev els which are atten uated by up to 10 dB • control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear c[...]

974 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card • suppor t of National and Inter national bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daughterboard • D-channel interf ace daughterboard • downloadab le D-channel handler daughterboard • 32 software-selectab le Tx and Rx P ad values • conv ersion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) • Card-LAN f or maintena[...]

Architecture 975 • slip-buff ering receive messages • suppor t of National and Inter national bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daughterboard • D-channel interf ace daughterboard • downloadab le D-channel handler daughterboard • 32 software-selectab le Tx and Rx P ad values • conv ersion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)[...]

976 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card A description of each bloc k follo ws. The main functional bloc ks of the NTBK50 architecture are: • DS-30X interf ace • A07 signaling interface • digital pad • carrier interface • CEPT transceiv er • SLIP control • D-channel suppor t interf ace • clock controller interf ace • Card-LAN / echo / test por [...]

Architecture 977 The incoming serial bit stream is con ver ted to 8-bit parallel b ytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extr acted and inser ted by the A07 signaling interf ace circuitr y . Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused f or PCM. Digital P AD The software selects A-Law or µ-Law and one of 32 possible P AD values[...]

978 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Software selects A-la w or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible P AD values f or each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-la w is 54H and f or Mu-law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-la w . As the idle code and unequipped code ma y be countr y[...]

Architecture 979 As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes f or each direction. The 32 digital pads av ailable are illustrated in T able 407 "Digital pad values and offset allocations" (page 979) . The v alues shown are attenuation le vels (1.0dB is 1 dB of loss[...]

980 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Carrier interface F or the E1 interf ace, the connection to the external digital carr ier is provided by the line interf ace chip. This device pro vides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recov er y functions on the receiv e side, as well as toler ance to jitter and wander [...]

Architecture 981 Note: The ON position f or all the switches is to wards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left cor ner of each individual switch. The line interface provides f or the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cab le. The impedance is selected b y SW2, a[...]

982 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card T able 412 Carrier Shield grounding s witch settings Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN Note: The usual method is to g round the outer conductor of the receive coax signal. Settings are shown in the T able below . T able 413 Carrier shield grounding switc h sett[...]

Architecture 983 The receiver e xtracts data and clock from an AMI (Alter nate Mark Inv ersion) coded signal and outputs cloc k and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals ov er the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recov er y meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recom[...]

984 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card The remote loopback function causes the far-end de vice to transmit the same data that it receives , using the jitter attenuated receive cloc k. The data is additionally av ailable at the f ar-end receive data outputs . Local loopback causes the transmit data and cloc k to appear at the near-end clock and receive data out[...]

Architecture 985 • transmit data input • receive cloc k output • transmit cloc k output The receive and transmit cloc ks can be of slightly diff erent bit rates from each other as deter mined by the transmit and receiv e carr ier clocks . The NTBK50 suppor ts a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard. It is equiv alent to a single po[...]

986 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card mode, which is not suppor ted at this time. The DDCH suppor ts only a single por t which directly interf aces to the PRI motherboard. See T able 415 "Settings f or the DCHI dip s witch (SW1)" (page 986) . T able 415 Settings for the DCHI dip switc h (SW1) Switch Function On Off S1-1 ——— S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS[...]

Architecture 987 The signals at this por t conf or m to the EIA RS-232C standard. A Dual P or t U ART handles the functions of the ser ial por ts f or the Card-LAN serial link test por t interface . The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8 bit connected to por t A of the U AR T . The card-LAN interf ace is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit st[...]

988 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

989 NTBK51 Do wnloadable D-c hannel Handler daughterboar d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Functional description" (page 1003) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 990) "Functional description" (page 992) "Download operation" (page 996) Introduction The NTBK51 daughterboard pro[...]

990 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard — LAPD- software f or data link la yer processing — DCH interf ace — La yer 3 preprocessor — traffic repor ting including link capacity The NTBK51 provides the following f eatures and functions: • ISDN D-channel related protocol • Selftest • Loopback • D-channel loadware incl[...]

Physical description 991 • slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gatew ay . The card is not suppor ted in the Media Gatew ay Expansion. The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NT AK09 digital tr unk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NT AK09. One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the[...]

992 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NT AK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in T able 420 "F aceplate LED" (page 992) . T able 420 Faceplate LED State Definition On (Red) NTBK51 [...]

Functional description 993 The main functional b locks of the NTBK51 architecture include the f ollowing: • Microprocessors • Main memor y • Shared memor y • EPROM memory • Flash EPROM memory • EEPROM memory • Serial communication controller • Sanity timer • Bus timer Micropr ocessors One microprocessor handles data transf er betw[...]

994 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard One microprocessor handles data transf er between each serial interf ace and software, repor ts the status of each por t and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the por ts. A high perf or mance MPU suppor ts the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applicat[...]

Functional description 995 The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPR OM and is e xecuted on power up or reset. The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPR OM and is e xecuted on power up or reset. Flash EPROM memory Flash EPROM pro vides non-volatile storage f or the DDCH loadware which minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provi[...]

996 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is ref erenced as the Integrated Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexib le Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receiv e and transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transf er betw[...]

Download operation 997 Downloading ma y be perf or med in either of tw o modes: background or maintenance. Bef ore any downloading can take place, a D-channel link must be configured. The f ollowing situations may lead to software downloading: • during initialization when new software is installed • when enabling the card or application • du[...]

998 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard If a f orced download enable command is e xecuted in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are f orced down to the DDCH card, e ven if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. In order to complete a forced do wnload, the f ollowing conditions must be met: ?[...]

Download operation 999 After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are v alidated by the CS 1000 CPU . The software is stored in flash EPROM on the DDCH card and does not need to be downloaded. But if the software is missing due to new installation, corr uption, or loadware version mismatch, the CPU automatically [...]

1000 NTBK51 Downloadab le D-channel Handler daughterboard Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1001 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T runk car ds Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1001) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1002) "Functional description" (page 1003) "Operation" (page 1003) "Electrical specifications" (page 1005) "Connector[...]

1002 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards — Ireland • NTCK16BC generic Central Office tr unk card without PPM. — Brazil — Ireland — Me xico — T or tolla — Singapore • NTCK16AD generic Central Office tr unk card with PPM — T u r key • NTCK16BD generic Central Office tr unk card without PPM. — Argentina — T u r key [...]

Operation 1003 Functional description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office tr unk cards suppor t up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot. Both cards are e xactly the same except f or the P er iodic Pulse Meter ing (PPM) f eature. The NTCK16AX card suppor ts inter nal 12/16 kHz PPM but the NTCK16[...]

1004 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards Loop star t operation Loop star t operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. Idle state In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and r ing wires, providing a high impedance loop tow ard the Central Office. Call [...]

Electrical specifications 1005 Electrical specifications P ower requirements T able 421 "NTCK16 circuit card power requirements" (page 1005) shows the power requirements f or the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. T able 421 NTCK16 circuit card power requirements Voltage Idle Current Active current +15.0 V dc (Se[...]

1006 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards T able 423 NTCK16 pad switching Loss Analog-to-Digital Digital-to-Analog PAD out 0 dB –3 dB PAD in +4 dB +1 dB Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB . Connector pin assignments Cross connections Figure 282 "NTCK16 Central Office tr unk connections for NT8D37 I/[...]

Configuration 1007 Figure 282 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1008 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards Figure 283 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F , L, S Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Configuration 1009 Figure 284 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor te[...]

1010 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15. ROUT Route number 0-511 Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E 0-127 Range for Small System, [...]

Configuration 1011 Prompt Response Description BTID (See page 803 .) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO) Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Chile, Venezuela, Thailand, Korea = 06. Argentina = 12 or 07, Turkey = 14 SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no) STYP BTS Busy tone supervisio[...]

1012 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15. ROUT Route number 0-511 Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E 0-127 Range for Small System, [...]

Applications 1013 Prompt Response Description BTID (See 807 .) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO) Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Kuwait,Chile, Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand,Korea = 06. Argentina = 12 or 07, Turkey = 14 SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no) STYP BTS Busy tone [...]

1014 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards Note: PPM is av ailable on the NTCK16AX tr unk card. It is not suppor ted on the NTCK16BX tr unk card. PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central Office calls f or billing or administration pur poses. Detection limits Pulses detected b y the NTCK16AX circuit card must [...]

Applications 1015 LD 97 - Defining Loss Switching mode. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG TYPE: SYSP IPE system parameters configuration ... NATP YES Select North American transmission plan. Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this prompt must always be checked during installation. 2. Define Loss Switching Class Of Ser vi[...]

1016 NTCK16 Generic Central Office T r unk cards Call disconnect If any disconnect super vision is configured (CLS = BA T , BTS), the Loop Star t T runk is released when the disconnect signal is received. This applies also in call states such as r inging, camp-on, and DISA. There is no configuration inv olved f or this operation. Nor tel Communi[...]

1017 NTDK20 Small System Contr oller car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1017) "Memor y" (page 1019) "100BaseT IP daughterboards" (page 1020) "PC card interf ace" (page 1023) "Security device" (page 1023) "SDI por ts" (page 1024) [...]

1018 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still suppor ted. • up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards • two PCMCIA sock ets • three Serial Data Interface (SDI) por ts • 32 channels of Conferencing (64 if one dual-por t 100BaseT IP daughterboard is present, or 96 if two dual-por t 100BaseT IP daughterboards are [...]

Memory 1019 Figure 285 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboar d in the Call Ser ver Memory The major ity of system and customer configured data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and bac kup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the e vent of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retai[...]

1020 NTDK20 Small System Controller card processes temporar y automated routines and user-programmed commands while the system is r unning. The DRAM on the SSC card stores operating system files, user files, ov erlay data, patch codes, and the activ e cop y of the customer database. The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard is the NTTK25. It pe[...]

100BaseT IP daughterboards 1021 An optional second NTDK83 daughterboard can be mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Ser v er . Adding the second NTDK83 daughterboard provides suppor t f or up to f our Media Gatew ays . See Figure 286 "NTDK83AA dual-por t 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 1021) . The NTDK99AA (single-por t) daughterbo[...]

1022 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 287 NTDK99A single-por t 100BaseT IP daughterboard T able 424 Expansion daughterboards Daughterboard Number of ports Cable type Max. distance between Call Server and Media Gateway systems NTDK99 (used in Media Gateway) one NTDK83 (used in Call Server two Use the supplied NTTK34AA UTP CAT 5 RJ-45 2 m c[...]

Security device 1023 • Use Media Conv ersion de vices (third par ty conv er ters) to convert 100BaseT to fiber f or distances from 100 m to 40 km. See Figure 288 "Call Ser ver connection to Media Gatew ay" (page 1023) . Figure 288 Call Server connection to Media Gateway F or fur ther inf or mation or installation instructions, ref er t[...]

1024 NTDK20 Small System Controller card dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single ke ycode f or each system. Ref er to Figure 285 "NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Ser ver" (page 1019) f or the location of the de vice. This security scheme provides the following: • enables the system to operate [...]

Media Gatew ay/Media Gate way Expansion card slot assignment 1025 Conferencing Thir ty-two conference channels are provided b y the NTDK20 SSC card’s conf erence devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting e xpansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each dual IP daughterboard increases the total number of conference channels[...]

1026 NTDK20 Small System Controller card T able 426 Media Gatewa y and Media Gatewa y Expansion slot assignments Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion First Second Third Fourth Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot 11 112 113 11 4 1 21 [...]

Media Gatew ay/Media Gate way Expansion card slot assignment 1027 Figure 290 Media Gatewa y Expansion slots Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1028 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1029 NTD W60 Media Gate wa y Contr oller Car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1029) "Processor" (page 1032) "Ethernet por ts" (page 1032) "Expansion daughterboards" (page 1032) "Backplane interf ace" (page 1032) "Serial data interf ace [...]

1030 NTD W60 Media Gatew ay Controller Card • 128 MB RAM. • 4MB boot flash. • Internal CompactFlash (CF) card mounted on the card. It appears to the software as a standard A T A hard dr ive . • Embedded Ethernet switch. • Six 100 BaseT Ether net por ts for connection to e xter nal networking equipment. • F our character LED displa y on[...]

Introduction 1031 Figure 291 MGC bloc k diagram Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1032 NTD W60 Media Gatew ay Controller Card Processor The processor combines RISC processors, DSP resources, SDRAM controller , and U ARTs. The processor runs the application as well as providing tone and conf erence functions . It interf aces to the rest of the system using Ether net. Ethernet ports External connections Of the six external Ether n[...]

F aceplate LED display 1033 Serial data interface por ts The MGC has three ser ial data interface (SDI) por ts. The por ts can be used locally f or debugging, or they can be configured in the CS 1000E Call Se ver as system terminals. Only por ts SDI 0 and SDI 1 can be used to access the installation menu during initial configuration of the MGC. S[...]

1034 NTD W60 Media Gatew ay Controller Card LOAD Application software is loading. LLL:S IPMG super loop and MGC shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1 Faceplate LED displa y In a nor mal boot process the diagnostic messages would be display ed in the follo wing order : 1. BOO T 2. POST 3. P ASS 4[...]

1035 NTD W61 and NTD W66 Common Pr ocessor P entium Mobile Car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1035) "Cabinet/chassis suppor t" (page 1038) "Media storage" (page 1039) "Memor y" (page 1039) "Ethernet interfaces" (page 1039) "Serial dat[...]

1036 NTD W61 and NTDW66 Common Processor P entium Mobile Card The CP PM hardware includes the follo wing components and features: • Intel P entium processor . • Integrated Intel 855GME GMCH/Intel ICH-4 controller chipset. • T wo CompactFlash sock ets: (1) a fixed media disk (FMD) on the card and (2) a hot s wappab le remov able media disk (R[...]

Introduction 1037 Figure 292 CP PM high level hard ware bloc k diagram Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1038 NTD W61 and NTDW66 Common Processor P entium Mobile Card Figure 293 CP PM card Cabinet/chassis support The CP PM NTDW61 single-slot card is suppor ted in the f ollowing chassis: • Option 11C cabinet (except f or slot 0). • Option 11C e xpansion cabinet (except f or slot 0). • Option 11C Mini chassis (e xcept f or slot 0 and slot 4). • [...]

Ethernet interfaces 1039 Media storage Fixed media drive The fix ed media drive (FMD) is a CompactFlash (CF) card that is inter nal to the CP PM card. It is accessible only when the CP PM card is removed from the system. The FMD ser v es as a hard dr ive . The Fixed Media Drive is used when CP PM is a Call Ser ver . It is connected directly to the[...]

1040 NTD W61 and NTDW66 Common Processor P entium Mobile Card TLAN The TLAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT por t. By def ault this network interf ace is set to autonegotiate. This network interf ace is used for Signaling Ser ver applications . Serial data interface por ts The CP PM has two serial data interface (SDI) por ts: P or t 0 and P or [...]

F aceplate 1041 Faceplate The CP PM f aceplate is av ailable in two sizes: NTD W61 single slot, and NTD W66 double slot. The CP PM card f aceplate is equipped with Status, Active CPU , CF , and Ether net LED indicators. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-20[...]

1042 NTD W61 and NTDW66 Common Processor P entium Mobile Card Figure 294 CP PM NTD W61 and NTDW66 faceplates Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

LED indicators 1043 Faceplate b uttons Reset Reset (RST) generates a hard reset of the card. Init Init (INI) generates a manual initialization of the software. DIP switc h The DIP switch selects the media dr ive . CF MASTER/POSITION1 selects the Compact Flash (CF) FMD and HD MASTER/POSITION2 selects the Hard Drive FMD . LED indicators Status LED Th[...]

1044 NTD W61 and NTDW66 Common Processor P entium Mobile Card Ethernet LEDs ELAN and TLAN LEDs The functionality of the ELAN and TLAN network interf ace LED indicators is depicted in the follo wing figure. Figure 295 ELAN and TLAN por t LED indicators HSP LEDs The functionality of the HSP por t LED indicators is depicted in the f ollowing figure.[...]

1045 NTD W62 and NTD W64 Media Gate wa y Contr oller Daughterboar ds Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1045) "Media Gatew ay Controller card" (page 1045) "Daughterboard configurations" (page 1047) Introduction The NTDW60 Media Gate wa y Controller (MGC) card has [...]

1046 NTD W62 and NTDW64 Media Gatew ay Controller Daughterboards Figure 297 Media Gatewa y Controller with daughterboar ds Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

Media Gatewa y Controller card 1047 Figure 298 Daughterboard Daughterboard configurations The DBs are av ailable in two sizes: An NTD W62 32-por t daughterboard (DB-32) and an NTD W64 96-por t daughterboard (DB-96). There are four possib le Media Gatewa y configurations: • A pure TDM single Media Gatewa y with no DSP daughterboards or Media Car[...]

1048 NTD W62 and NTDW64 Media Gatew ay Controller Daughterboards • A DB-32 in DB expansion site #2. • A DB-32 in DB e xpansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB e xpansion site #2. • A DB-96 in DB expansion site #1. • A DB-96 in DB e xpansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB e xpansion site #2. The f ollowing table summarizes the suppor ted placement of t[...]

1049 NTD W65 V oice Gate wa y Media Car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1049) "Ethernet por ts" (page 1050) "Backplane interf aces" (page 1050) "Serial data interf ace por ts" (page 1051) "F aceplate LED displa y" (page 1051) Introduction T[...]

1050 NTD W65 V oice Gate way Media Card • 10/100 BaseT ELAN network interface f or management and signalling messages. • 10/100BaseT TLAN network interf ace for telephony v oice traffic. • FPGA f or backplane interf aces. • T wo TTY por ts on the processor f or debugging. • 100BaseT f aceplate por t f or debugging. Figure 299 V oice Gate[...]

F aceplate LED display 1051 • A10 signalling. • CardLan interf ace. • Hardware watchdog. • Time-s witch for fle xible TDM timeslot mapping. Serial data interface por ts The Media Card has two ser ial data interf ace por ts on the master MSP . The installation menu can by accessed through either por t. TTY settings The def ault tty settings[...]

1052 NTD W65 V oice Gate way Media Card 4. LOAD If there is a f atal self-test error dur ing bootup , an error code appears and the P ASS and LOAD message are not display ed. During nor mal operation after bootup, the f aceplate displa ys Leader (L) or F ollower (F) and the number of registered sets. F or example , ’L027’ means Leader of 27 set[...]

1053 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1053) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1055) "Functional description" (page 1063) "Software description" (page 1065) "Hardware description" (page 1065) "Architecture" [...]

1054 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets , the active Cloc k Controller (NT AK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. F or FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occup y any a vailab le slot 1-9. Note 2: On non-ECM system cabinets, the NT AK20 can be placed in slots 1-9. On ca[...]

Physical description 1055 T o provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entr y f or the card. This card replaces the NT AK09 described in "NT AK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card" (page 859) . The TMDI f eature does not affect the NT AK09 functionality . The configuration and maintenance changes to the car[...]

1056 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 300 NTRB21 TMDI card with c lock controller In general, the first five LEDs oper ate as follo ws: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in prog ress, the LEDs flash on and off three times , then go into their appropr iate states, as shown in T able 432 "NTRB21 LED sta[...]

Physical description 1057 LED State Definition Off No red alarm. YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. LBK On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. Figure 301 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1058) shows the f aceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 card use[...]

1058 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 301 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate The NTRB21 card has se ven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTRB21 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard R[...]

Physical description 1059 In general, the first five LEDs oper ate as follo ws: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in prog ress, the LEDs flash on and off three times , then go into their appropr iate states, as shown in T able 433 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 1059) . T able 433 NTRB21 LED states LED St[...]

1060 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 302 NTRB21 TMDI card with c lock controller In general, the first five LEDs oper ate as follo ws: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in prog ress, the LEDs flash on and off three times , then go into their appropr iate states, as shown in T able 433 "NTRB21 LED sta[...]

Physical description 1061 LED State Definition On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. RED Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. YEL Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. LBK Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. Figure 303 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1062) shows the f ace[...]

1062 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 303 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate P ower requirements The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the bac kplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V , 50 mA on +12 V , and 50 mA on –12 V . Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-20[...]

Functional description 1063 The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the bac kplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V , 50 mA on +12 V , and 50 mA on -12 V . The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the bac kplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V , 50 mA on +12 V , and 50 mA on –12 V . Foreign and surge volta g e protection Lightning protectors must be [...]

1064 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card • Card-LAN f or maintenance communication • loopback capabilities f or both near-end and far-end • echo canceler interf ace • integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mix ed on the same PRI) • f aceplate monitor jacks f or T1 interface • configurab le D-channel data rate[...]

Hardware description 1065 • 1.5 Mb Clock recov er y and distribution of reference cloc ks • DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods • card status and alar m indication with f aceplate-mounted LED • automatic alarm monitor ing and handling • Card-LAN f or maintenance communications • loopback capabilities f or both near-end and far-end • echo [...]

1066 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 304 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets , the active Cloc k Controller (NT AK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. F or FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occup y any a vailab le slot 1-9. Note 2: The NTRB21 TMDI card requires that [...]

Architecture 1067 Figure 305 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1068) shows a f aceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital T runk Interf ace or Primar y Rate Interface functionality on the CS 1000. The NTRB21 has a built-in do wnloadable D-channel. Note: The NTRB21 can be used with the NT AK09 DTI/PR[...]

1068 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 305 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Interconnection The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carr ier cable . The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot e xtension cable , is also av ailable . The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable (A0394216). The NTBK04 is twenty f eet long.[...]

Architecture 1069 The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carr ier cable . The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot e xtension cable , is also av ailable . Micropr ocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the f ollowing major tasks: • T ask handler : also ref erred to as an e xecutiv e. The task handle[...]

1070 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the f ollowing major tasks: • T ask handler : also ref erred to as an e xecutiv e. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task e xecution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. • T ransmit voice: inser ts digital pads, manipulate[...]

Architecture 1071 Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 A idle code, 7F 3db B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D –2dB spare E –5db spare F –6db spare The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transf er function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator . The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There[...]

1072 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card combinations each f or Mu255 to Mu255, Mu255 to A-La w , A-Law to Mu255, and A-La w to A-Law . These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and le vel plan. T able 437 Digital pad values and offset allocations Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 0 0dB –7db 1 2dB –8db 2 3dB –9db 3 4dB –10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.1dB 7db [...]

Architecture 1073 • 64 kbps clear • 64 kbps inv er ted (64 Kbps restr icted) DCHI can be enabled and disab led independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inser ted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled. On the NTRB21 use s witch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel[...]

1074 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card F eature selection through software configuration f or the D-channel includes: • 56 kbps • 64 kbps clear • 64 kbps inv er ted (64 Kbps restr icted) DCHI can be enabled and disab led independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inser ted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be establ[...]

Architecture 1075 The transmitter takes the binar y data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiv er and produces bipolar pulses f or transmission to the e xter nal digital f acility . The Digital Signal – Le vel 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal Cross-connect – Lev el 1 (D[...]

1076 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network The connection to the e xter nal digital carr ier is via a 15 position Male D type connector . T able [...]

Architecture 1077 NT AK20 Clock Contr oller (CC) daughterboard Digital T runking requires synchronized cloc king so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all par ts of the network. The NT AK20 clock controller circuitr y synchronizes the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Mer idian 1 PBX 11C [...]

1078 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Digital T runking requires synchronized cloc king so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all par ts of the network. On CS 1000 systems, synchronization is accomplished with the NT AK20 clock controller circuit card. The clock controller circuitr y synchr[...]

1079 NTVQ01xx Media Car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1079) "Hardware architecture" (page 1080) "Functional description" (page 1083) "Sur vivability" (page 1083) Physical description The Media Card replaces the ITG P entium card and is av[...]

1080 NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 306 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides f aceplate and backplane interf aces, which are used to connect e xter nal LANs. This section provides inf or mation on the f aceplate connectors and indicators. Hard ware arc hitecture The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-por t and 32-por t. Faceplate conne[...]

Hardware architecture 1081 PC card slot This slot accepts standard PC card flash cards, including A T A Flash cards (3 Mbit/s to 170 Mbit/s). Nor tel supply PCM card adaptors which enable CompactFlash cards to be used in this slot. This slot is used f or NTVQ01xx Media Card software upgrades, bac king up announcements, and additional storage. Ethe[...]

1082 NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 307 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate RS-232 Asynchr onous Maintenance P or t An 8-pin mini-DIN sock et on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 por t. This faceplate por t can provide access to the Media Card for O A&M pur poses. The maintenance por t is also av ailable through a female DB9[...]

Survivability 1083 Functional description Media Cards use different types of firmware pre-installed, depending on the application being suppor ted. The V oice Gatewa y application enab les Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) f or either line or tr unk applications. When the V oice Gatew ay application is installed on the Media Card, the card is calle[...]

1084 NTVQ01xx Media Card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1085 NTVQ55AA ITG P entium car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1085) "Functional description" (page 1085) Physical description The NTVQ55AA ITG P entium (ITG-P) card suppor ts IP Phones by providing a communication gatew ay f or the IP Phone between the IP dat[...]

1086 NTVQ55AA ITG P entium card W ARNING The NWK connector looks like a 9-pin ser ial connector . Do not connect a serial cable or any other cable to it. If a cable is installed to the NWK connector , the TLAN interface card is disabled. ITG-P LED (Card Status) The red status faceplate LED indicates the enabled/disab led status of the 24-card por t[...]

Functional description 1087 Figure 308 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate Note: There are no Ether net status LEDs for the ELAN management interf ace. NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interf ace card Ether net activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is receiv ed from the TLAN interf ace card Ethernet hub . • Y ellow – ?[...]

1088 NTVQ55AA ITG P entium card PC card slots The ITG-P card has one f aceplate PC card slot, designated drive A. The PC card slot is used for optional maintenance (backup and restore). The ITG-P card also has one unused inboard slot, designated drive B . The PC card slots suppor t PC-based hard disks (A T A interface) or high-capacity PC flash me[...]

1089 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1089) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1090) "Functional description" (page 1091) "Connector pin assignments" (page 1095) "Configuring the ESDI card" (page 1097) [...]

1090 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) • NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) • NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When as ESDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any I/O de[...]

Functional description 1091 Figure 309 CPC513 ESDI card fr ont panel Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two-por t synchronous ser ial data interf ace card. See Figure 310 "ESDI card bloc k diagram" (page 1092) . The two ser ial input/output data por ts ter minate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the ca[...]

1092 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card Each por t operates independently in synchronous mode, in half or full duple x, at speeds of up to 64 kbps. Each por t can be connected to either Data T er minal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE). The electr ical interface f or the ESDI card ma y be either EIA RS-232-C or a propr[...]

Functional description 1093 The characteristics of the synchronous communication por ts are shown in T able 443 "Characteristics of synchronous por ts" (page 1093) . T able 443 Characteristics of synchr onous por ts Characteristics Description Duplex mode half, (full) Data rate (bps) 1200, 2400, (4800), 9600, 19200, 48000, 56000, 64000 Cl[...]

1094 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardware f aults on the card and link lev el LAPB protocol f aults. It repor ts the f aults to the CPU when predeter mined thresholds (downloaded at initialization) are e xceeded. Fault isolation The ESDI/Command and Status Link (CSL) maintenance soft[...]

Connector pin assignments 1095 • High-speed interf ace: The high-speed interface combines f eatures of the RS-422-A standard for the data and timing signals with standard RS-232-C control signals . It is used when the signal rate is g reater than 19.2 kbps and/or when the distance between the system and host is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft). No mo[...]

1096 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card T able 445 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - RS-232-C interface Signal source Pin number Signal functions To DCE From DCE EIA circuit Ground and common return 1 Shielded n/a n/a 7 Signal ground (SG) n/a n/a AB Data 2 Transmitted data (TX) 3 — BA 3 Received data (RX) — 3 BB Control 4 Request t[...]

Configuring the ESDI card 1097 Signal source Pin number Signal functions To DCE From DCE EIA circuit (lead) Data 2 3 13 16 Transmitted data – lead A Received data – lead A Transmitted data – lead B Received data – lead B 3 — 3 — — 3 — 3 BA (A) BB (A) BA (B) BB (B) Control 4 5 6 8 20 Request to send (RTS) Clear to send (CTS) Data se[...]

1098 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card Synchronous por t address space is the same as asynchronous por t address space. When selecting an address f or the ESDI card, make sure that it does not conflict with an address currently being used by an asynchronous card. T able 447 "ESDI card address switch settings" (page 1098) shows [...]

Configuring the ESDI card 1099 Figure 312 ESDI card option s witch locations T able 448 ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings Mode Port Jumper socket designations Data communication equipment (DTE) 1 UA10 UA12 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 1 UA9 UA11 Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0[...]

1100 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card Mode Port Jumper socket designations Data communication equipment (DTE) 2 UA17 UA19 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 2 UA16 UA18 T able 449 ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper settings Mode Port Jumper socket designations RS-232-C interface 1 UB9 UB11 High-speed interface 1 UB10 UB12 RS-232-C[...]

Applications 1101 Prompt Response Description USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details. XSM (NO) YES Port is used for the system monitor. Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interf ace card is used an[...]

1102 QPC513 Enhanced Ser ial Data Interface card Figure 313 QPC513 ESDI card cabling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1103 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1103) "Ph ysical descr iption" (page 1104) "Functional description" (page 1105) "Connector pin assignments" (page 1107) "Configuring the QSDI card" (page 1109) &quo[...]

1104 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card • NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inacti[...]

Functional description 1105 Figure 314 QPC841 QSDI card fr ont panel Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interf ace card contains all the logic f or four asynchronous serial por ts, including the baud rate generators. These serial por ts are directly accessed by the system processor using memor y reads and writes. Nor tel Communicati[...]

1106 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interf ace card contains four univ ersal asynchronous receiver/transmitters (U AR Ts) and the logic necessar y to connect the U ARTs to the system processor bus . See Figure 315 "QPC841 QSDI card bloc k diagram" (page 1106) . The other logic on the card consists of f[...]

Connector pin assignments 1107 Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to por t one, and uses the RS-232-C standard DB-25-pinout. Connector J2 is connected to por ts two , three, and f our , and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connect[...]

1108 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card T able 452 Connector J2 pin assignments Pin Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 FGD Frame ground Frame ground 2 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data 3 RD Received data Received data 4 RTS Request to send (not used) Request to send (Note 2) 5 2 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to [...]

Configuring the QSDI card 1109 Pin Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 21 CD Carrier detect (Note 1 Carrier detect (not used) 22 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)) Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to [...]

1110 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card SW14 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 off off off off off off off off Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never use identical settings. Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to O[...]

Configuring the QSDI card 1111 Port 3 – SW4 Port 3 – SW5 Mode 1234 5 61234 5 6 DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on Port 4 – SW2 Port 4 – SW3 Mode 1234 5 61234 5 6 DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on o[...]

1112 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card Figure 316 QSDI card option switc h locations Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record programLD 17. Instr uctions f or r unning the Configuration Record [...]

Applications 1113 Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in T able 456 "LD 17 - Serial por t configuration parameters" (page 1113) These parameters must be configured f or each por t that is being used. T able 456 LD 17 - Serial por t configuration parameters Prompt Res[...]

1114 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card — QCAD290 Note: This cable is a vailab le in different lengths . Ref er to Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more inf or mation — QCAD42 • SDI male-to-male round cables (e xter nal use only) — NT8D95 • SDI to I/O cables (system options use only) — NT8D82 Note: This cable is a vailab[...]

Applications 1115 Figure 317 QPC841 QSDI card cab ling Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1116 QPC841 Quad Ser ial Data Interface card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1117 The TDS/DTR car d Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1117) "F eatures" (page 1117) Introduction The TDS/DTR card function was incor porated into the NTDK20 SSC. Howe v er , it is still suppor ted on the system. The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTD[...]

1118 The TDS/DTR card T one detector The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual T one Multi-F requency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law . In Nor th America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-La w tone detection. SDI function The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Ser ial Data Interface) por ts. Ref er to "SDI por ts" in Commu[...]

Features 1119 Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30* res[...]

1120 The TDS/DTR card Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 51* reserved 52* reserved 53 1300/1500 -13/-13 0 54 700/900 -13/-13 1 55 700/1100 -13/-13 2/CC 56 900/1100 -13/-13 3 57 700/1300 -13/-13 4 58 900/1300 -13/-13 5 59 1100/1300 -13/-13 6 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -[...]

Features 1121 Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 83* reserved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97* TBD 98* TBD 99* TBD 100* TBD 101 6[...]

1122 The TDS/DTR card Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 3 700 X 1340 -14/-13 2 4 700 X 1480 -14/-13 3 5 770 X 1210 -14/-13 4 6 770 X 1340 -14/-13 5 7 770 X 1480 -14/-13 6 8 850 X 1210 -14/-13 7 9 850 X 1340 -14/-13 8 10 850 X 1480 -14/-13 9 11 940 X 1340 -14/-13 0 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X [...]

Features 1123 Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4 118 770/1340 -12/-10[...]

1124 The TDS/DTR card Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 139 700/1210 -18/-17 1 140 700/1340 -18/-17 2 141 700/1480 -18/-17 3 142 770/1210 -18/-17 4 143 770/1340 -18/-17 5 144 770/1480 -18/-17 6 145 850/1210 -18/-17 7 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149[...]

Features 1125 Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174* reserved 3 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0 185 940 0 F 186 1880 0 I 187 400 -22 188 420 X 25 -1[...]

1126 The TDS/DTR card Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 204 700/1630 -9/-7 205 770/1630 -9/-7 206 850/1630 -9/-7 207 420 -10 208 420 -8 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-1[...]

Features 1127 Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits MF Digits 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -17/-15 7 Note: T ones mar ked with * are not suppor ted by IP sets and therefore should not be selected in an[...]

1128 The TDS/DTR card Nor tel Communication Ser v er 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks .[...]

1129 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Contr ol pr otocol Contents This section contains information on the follo wing topics: "Introduction" (page 1129) "Operation" (page 1129) "F rame structure" (page 1130) "LAPB balanced class of procedure" (page 1131) "Commands and responses" (page 1131) "Descripti[...]

1130 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Frame structure All transmissions are in frames and each frame conf or ms to the f or mat shown in T able 459 "LAPB frame structure" (page 1130) . In par ticular , frame elements for applications using a por t on the QPC513 f ollow these LAPB conv entions: • Zero inf or mation field is pe[...]

Commands and responses 1131 LAPB balanced class of pr ocedure Applications which use por ts on the QPC513 are automatically designated as BAC , 2, 8 (for e xample, balanced operation, asynchronous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functions 2 and 8 implemented). Balanced configuration A balanced configuration is one in which two comb[...]

1132 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Command Response Option RNR RNR REJ REJ or FRMR 2 SABM UA DISC DM Legend: I: Information RR: Receive ready RNR: Receive not ready REJ: Reject SABM: Set asynchronous balanced mode DISC: Disconnect RSET: Reset FRMR: Frame reject UA: Unnumbered acknowledge DM: Disconnect mode Option 2: Provides ability f[...]

[...]

Nor tel Communication Ser ver 1000 Circuit Card Ref erence Copyright © 2003-2008, Nor tel Networks All Rights Reser ved. Publication: NN43001-311 Document status: Standard Document version: 01.04 Document date: 23 May 2008 T o provide f eedback or repor t a problem with this document, go to h ttp://www .nor tel.com/documentfeedbac k . Sourced in C[...]